OptiX PTN 960 V100R005C01 Hardware Description 02
-
Upload
michael-wong -
Category
Documents
-
view
229 -
download
28
description
Transcript of OptiX PTN 960 V100R005C01 Hardware Description 02
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTNSeries
V100R005C01
Hardware Description
Issue 02
Date 2013-08-10
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX PTN 960 V100R005C01
Huawei iManager U2000 V100R009C00
Intended AudienceThis document describes the equipment structure, chassis structure, and board classification.This document also describes each board of these classes in details.
This document helps you get the detailed information about the equipment hardware.
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers
l Hardware installation engineers
l System maintenance engineers
Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
DANGERDANGER indicates a hazard with a high level or mediumlevel of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death orserious injury.
WARNINGWARNING indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which,if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description About This Document
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
Symbol Description
CAUTIONCAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that,if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
TIP TIP indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.
NOTE NOTE provides additional information to emphasize orsupplement important points of the main text.
GUI ConventionsThe GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change HistoryUpdates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document versioncontains all updates made to previous versions.
Changes in Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Based on Product Version V100R005C01
Compared with Product Version (V100R005C01)_Doc Version 01 (2013-05-31), the manualof this issue provides the following updates.
Update Change Description
3.1 Valid Slots The structure is adjusted as follows:"Valid Slots for Boards" is moved to 3 Boards.
3 Boards The following topics are added:l 3.2 Mapping Between the System Control Board
and Interface Boardl 3.4 Differences Between System Control Boards
Pluggable Electrical Module The mapping boards are updated.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description About This Document
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
Update Change Description
Whole document Known bugs are updated.
Changes in Issue 01 (2013-05-31) Based on Product Version V100R005C01This document is the first release of the V100R005C01 version. Compared with Product Version(V100R005C00)_Doc Version 02 (2013-01-15), the manual of this issue provides the followingupdates.
Update Change Description
3 Boards The following topics are added:l 3.3 Mapping Between Service Interfaces and
Interface Numbers on the U2000
D Board Dimensions This topic is added.
Whole document Known bugs are updated.
Changes in Issue 02 (2013-01-15) Based on Product Version V100R005C00Compared with issue 01 of the V100R005C00 version, this issue has the following updates:
Update Description
Functions and Features (Boards with Ethernetinterfaces)
Description of supported port working modesis added.
Working Principle and Signal Flow (Systemcontrol boards)
l Block diagrams are modified.l Description about the CF card functions is
added.
2 Extended Chassis Dimensions and weight of the extendedchassis are added.
C Mounting Ears Dimensions of the mounting ears are added.
Whole manual Known defects are fixed.
Changes in Issue 01 (2012-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00This document is the first release of the V100R005C00 version.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description About This Document
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Chassis.............................................................................................................................................1
2 Extended Chassis...........................................................................................................................3
3 Boards..............................................................................................................................................53.1 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................................................73.2 Mapping Between the System Control Board and Interface Board...............................................................................83.3 Mapping Between Service Interfaces and Interface Numbers on the U2000.................................................................93.4 Differences Between System Control Boards..............................................................................................................103.5 TND3CXPA.................................................................................................................................................................113.5.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................113.5.2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................113.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................123.5.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................143.5.5 Board Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................................193.5.6 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................193.6 TND3CXPB..................................................................................................................................................................193.6.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................193.6.2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................193.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................203.6.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................223.6.5 Board Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................................263.6.6 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................273.7 TND1EX1.....................................................................................................................................................................273.7.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................273.7.2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................273.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................283.7.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................303.7.5 Board Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................................313.7.6 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................313.8 TND1EM8F..................................................................................................................................................................323.8.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................33
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
3.8.2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................333.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................343.8.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................353.8.5 Board Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................................373.8.6 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................383.9 TND1EM8T..................................................................................................................................................................423.9.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................423.9.2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................423.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................433.9.4 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................453.9.5 Board Configuration Reference.................................................................................................................................473.9.6 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................473.10 TND1EM4F................................................................................................................................................................473.10.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................473.10.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................483.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................483.10.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................503.10.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................523.10.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................523.11 TND1EM4T................................................................................................................................................................573.11.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................573.11.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................573.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................583.11.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................603.11.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................623.11.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................623.12 TND2AQ1..................................................................................................................................................................623.12.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................623.12.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................633.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................643.12.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................663.12.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................673.12.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................673.13 TND1SQ1...................................................................................................................................................................693.13.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................703.13.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................703.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................713.13.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................733.13.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................743.13.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................753.14 TND1CQ1B................................................................................................................................................................77
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
3.14.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................773.14.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................773.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................793.14.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................813.14.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................823.14.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................823.15 TND3ML1A/TND3ML1B.........................................................................................................................................843.15.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................853.15.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................853.15.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................873.15.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................883.15.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................913.15.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................913.16 TND2MD1A/TND2MD1B........................................................................................................................................923.16.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................923.16.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................923.16.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................943.16.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................963.16.5 Board Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................................983.16.6 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................983.17 TND1PIU....................................................................................................................................................................993.17.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................993.17.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................993.17.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................1003.17.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................1013.17.5 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................1023.18 TND1FAN................................................................................................................................................................1033.18.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................1033.18.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................1033.18.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................1033.18.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................1053.18.5 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................106
4 Filler Panel..................................................................................................................................1074.1 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................................................1084.2 Appearance and Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................108
5 Pluggable Optical Modules.....................................................................................................1095.1 Appearance and Application......................................................................................................................................1105.2 Optical Module Labels...............................................................................................................................................111
6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System.............................................................1156.1 Structure and Functions..............................................................................................................................................116
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
6.2 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................................1186.3 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................................122
7 Fibers and Cables......................................................................................................................1247.1 Fibers..........................................................................................................................................................................1267.1.1 Fiber Types..............................................................................................................................................................1267.1.2 Common Fiber Connectors......................................................................................................................................1277.2 -48 V Power Supply Cable.........................................................................................................................................1297.3 Power Cable for the EPS30-4815AF..........................................................................................................................1307.4 PGND Cables.............................................................................................................................................................1337.5 Service Cables............................................................................................................................................................1347.5.1 Ethernet Cables........................................................................................................................................................1347.5.2 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables...........................................................................................................................................1377.5.3 120-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................1407.6 Management Cables...................................................................................................................................................1437.7 Clock Cables...............................................................................................................................................................1447.7.1 External Clock Cables.............................................................................................................................................1447.7.2 Clock Bridging Cable..............................................................................................................................................1467.8 Alarm Input/Output Cables........................................................................................................................................1487.9 AC Power Monitoring and Alarm-reporting Cable....................................................................................................149
A Safety Labels.............................................................................................................................151
B Indicators....................................................................................................................................154
C Mounting Ears...........................................................................................................................161
D Board Dimensions....................................................................................................................166
E Power Consumption and Weight...........................................................................................167
F Board Configuration Parameters............................................................................................168
G Glossary......................................................................................................................................170
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description Contents
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
1 Chassis
The OptiX PTN 960 is case-shaped for easy deployment.
Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX PTN 960 equipment.
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX PTN 960
The dimensions of the OptiX PTN 960 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 2 U (height, 1U = 44.45 mm).
The OptiX PTN 960 can be installed in the following:
l ETSI cabinet (300 mm deep)
l ETSI cabinet (600 mm deep)
l 19 inch cabinet (450 mm deep)
l 19 inch cabinet (600 mm deep)
l Indoor Mini Box (IMB) network box
l APM30H outdoor cabinet
l Open rack
The PTN equipment can be installed indoors or outdoors. The installation must satisfy therequirement of running environment for equipment. To better satisfy the requirement, you caninstall the equipment in an IMB network cabinet or an APM30H outdoor cabinet. Use theEPS30-4815AF external AC power supply system to provide power to the IMB network box oroutdoor cabinet.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 1 Chassis
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
Figure 1-2 Slot allocation of the OptiX PTN 960
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 Slot 2
Slot 5 Slot 6
CXP Slot 7 CXP Slot 8PIUSlot 10
PIUSlot 9
FANSlot 11
System control board area
Interface board areaPower board area
Fan board area
The slot capability of the slots housing the board varies with the system control board. Table1-1 lists the processing capacity of each slot in the OptiX PTN 960 chassis.
Table 1-1 Slot capacity of the OptiX PTN 960
Slot Number TND3CXPA TND3CXPB
1 to 2 8 x 1G 8 x 1G
3 to 4 4 x 1G 4 x 1G or 1 x 10G
5 to 6 1 x 10G 1 x 10G
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 1 Chassis
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
2 Extended Chassis
OptiX PTN 960 supports an extended chassis with the power supply monitoring module, andprovides slots 12 and 13 for installing the AC power supply modules.
Slot Allocation
Figure 2-1 shows the slot allocation of the extended chassis.
Figure 2-1 Slot allocation of the extended chassis
SLOT 3 SLOT 4
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
SLOT 5 SLOT 6
SLOT 7 SLOT 8SLOT 10
SLOT 9
SLOT 11
SLOT 12 SLOT 13 Monitoring Module
Functions
Functions of the extended chassis are as follows:
l Provides an interface for inputting AC power to provide 220 V/110 V AC power to theequipment.
l Provides slots 12 and 13 for installing TND2APIU modules. APIU modules are used toconvert the AC power to the DC power, and their online status can be queried on the NMS.The two APIU modules work at the same time in load-sharing mode and they are hotbackups for each other.
The chassis is configured with one or two rectifier modules. When one APIU module isconfigured, the maximum output current is 15 A; when two APIU modules are configured,the maximum output current is 30 A.
NOTE
A filler panel must be inserted into an empty slot intended for a rectifier module.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 2 Extended Chassis
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
l Integrates a monitoring module that provides an active and a standby RS232/RS485communication interfaces, enables the device to monitor the AC input status of theEPS30-4815 power supply system, and reserves one DB50 interface for later extension ofthe monitoring function.
l Provides two load interfaces for outputting -53.5 V DC power to two PIUs, which providepower to the OptiX PTN 960.
l Provides two load control fuses, that is, FU-1 with a fuse capacity of 10 A and FU-2 witha fuse capacity of 20 A. These fuses enable/disable output of the load and provide overloadand short-circuit protection for the load.
l Provides one interface for connecting to a group of storage batteries. When workingnormally, the OptiX PTN 960 is charging the storage batteries. When input of the 220 V/110 V AC power stops, the storage batteries provide power to the OptiX PTN 960. Thisensures uninterrupted power supply to the OptiX PTN 960.
l Provides a storage battery protection fuse, that is, FU-3 with a fuse capacity of 20 A. Thisfuse enables/disables the storage batteries and provides overload and short-circuitprotection for the storage batteries.
Dimensions and WeightDimensions (mm): 446 (width) x 250 (depth) x 3 U (height, 3 U = 133.35 mm)
Weight (empty chassis, kg): 5.60
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 2 Extended Chassis
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
3 Boards
About This Chapter
OptiX PTN 960 include system control, cross-connect and protocol processing board, interfaceboards, power supply board, and fan board.
3.1 Valid SlotsBoards are the key hardware components of the equipment.
3.2 Mapping Between the System Control Board and Interface BoardInterface boards supported by OptiX PTN 960 depends on the system control board configuredon it.
3.3 Mapping Between Service Interfaces and Interface Numbers on the U2000This topic describes the mapping between service interfaces on the OptiX PTN 960 and interfacenumbers on the U2000.
3.4 Differences Between System Control BoardsThis topic describes the differences between system control boards for the OptiX PTN 960.
3.5 TND3CXPAThis section describes the CXPA, which is the system control, cross-connect and protocolprocessing board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, andtechnical specifications.
3.6 TND3CXPBThis section describes the CXPB, which is the system control, cross-connect and protocolprocessing board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, andtechnical specifications.
3.7 TND1EX1This section describes the EX1, which is an interface board with one 10GE optical interfaces,in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technicalspecifications.
3.8 TND1EM8FThis section describes the EM8F, which is an interface board with eight FE/GE optical interfaces,in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technicalspecifications.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
3.9 TND1EM8TThis section describes the EM8T, which is an interface board with eight FE/GE electricalinterfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, andtechnical specifications.
3.10 TND1EM4FThis section describes the EM4F, which is an interface board with four FE/GE optical interfaces,in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technicalspecifications.
3.11 TND1EM4TThis section describes the EM4T, which is an interface board with four FE/GE electricalinterfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, andtechnical specifications.
3.12 TND2AQ1This section describes the TND2AQ1, a 4 x STM-1 ATM service interface board, in terms ofthe version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
3.13 TND1SQ1This section describes the TND1SQ1, 4 channels STM-1 service interface board, in terms of theversion, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
3.14 TND1CQ1BThis section describes the TND1CQ1B, which is a 4 x STM-1 optical interface board, in termsof the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
3.15 TND3ML1A/TND3ML1BThis section describes the ML1A/ML1B, a 16-channel E1 electrical interface board, in terms ofthe version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
3.16 TND2MD1A/TND2MD1BThis section describes the MD1A/MD1B, a 32-channel E1 electrical interface board, in termsof the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
3.17 TND1PIUThis section describes the TND1PIU, a power input unit, in terms of the version, functions,features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
3.18 TND1FANThis section describes the TND1FAN, a fan board, in terms of the version, functions, features,working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
3.1 Valid SlotsBoards are the key hardware components of the equipment.
Board Description and Valid Slots
Table 3-1 shows the boards supported by the OptiX PTN 960 and their valid slots.
Table 3-1 Boards supported by the OptiX PTN 960 and their valid slots
Board Name Board Description Valid Slot
TND3CXPA System control, switchingand timing board
Slot 7, slot 8
TND3CXPB System control, switchingand timing board
Slot 7, slot 8
TND1EX1 1 Channel 10GE OpticalInterface Board
Slots 5-6 (working with theTND3CXPA board)Slots 3-6 (working with theTND3CXPB board)
TND1EM8F 8 Channels GE/FE OpticalInterface Board
Slots 1-2
TND1EM8T 8 Channels GE/FE CopperInterface Board
Slots 1-2
TND1EM4F 4 Channels GE/FE OpticalInterface Board
Slots 1-4
TND1EM4T 4 Channels GE/FE CopperInterface Board
Slots 1-4
TND3ML1A 16 Channels E1 serviceinterface board (75 ohms)
Slots 1-6
TND3ML1B 16 Channels service interfaceboard (120 ohms)
Slots 1-6
TND2MD1A 32 Channels service interfaceboard (75 ohms)
Slots 1-6
TND2MD1B 32 Channels service interfaceboard (120 ohms)
Slots 1-6
TND1CQ1B 4 Channels STM-1 OpticalInterface Board
Slots 1-6
TND1SQ1 4 Channels STM-1 OpticalInterface Board
Slots 1-6
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
Board Name Board Description Valid Slot
TND2AQ1 4 Channels STM-1 OpticalInterface Board
Slots 1-6
TND2APIU Power board Slots 12-13
TND1PIU Power board Slots 9-10
TND1FAN Fan board Slot 11
Board Relationships
The OptiX PTN 960 uses different boards to achieve various functions.
Figure 3-1 shows board relationships of the OptiX PTN 960.
Figure 3-1 Board relationships of the OptiX PTN 960
Network sideUser side
Control and management
module
Service processing
and forwarding
module
Clock module
Power supply module
APIU/ PIU
Heat dissipation
module FAN
TND3CXPA/TND3CXPB
1 432
1. ETH/OAM2. CLK3. TOD4. ALMI/O
STM-1 (VC12)CQ1B
E1
EM8T/EM8FGE/FE
EM4T/EM4FGE/FE
EX110GE
MD1A/MD1BE1
ML1A/ML1B
STM-1 (VC3/VC4)
SQ1
AQ1ATM STM-1
E1
EM8T/EM8F GE/FE
EM4T/EM4F GE/FE
EX1 10GE
MD1A/MD1B E1
ML1A/ML1B
3.2 Mapping Between the System Control Board andInterface Board
Interface boards supported by OptiX PTN 960 depends on the system control board configuredon it.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
Table 3-2 provides the mapping between the system control board and interface board for theOptiX PTN 960.
NOTE
l √: The interface board can be used with the system control board.
l X: The interface board cannot be used with the system control board.
Table 3-2 Mapping between the system control board and interface board
Board TND3CXPA TND3CXPB
TND1EX1 √ √
TND1EM8F √ √
TND1EM8T √ √
TND1EM4F √ √
TND1EM4T √ √
TND2AQ1 √ √
TND3ML1A √ √
TND3ML1B √ √
TND2MD1A √ √
TND2MD1B √ √
TND1SQ1 √ √
TND1CQ1B √ √
3.3 Mapping Between Service Interfaces and InterfaceNumbers on the U2000
This topic describes the mapping between service interfaces on the OptiX PTN 960 and interfacenumbers on the U2000.
Table 3-3 shows the mapping between service interfaces on the OptiX PTN 960 and interfacenumbers on the U2000.
Table 3-3 Mapping between service interfaces on the OptiX PTN 960 and interface numberson the U2000
Board Name Service Interface(s)
Interface number(s) on the U2000
TND1EX1 OUT IN D1EX1-1(PORT1)
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
Board Name Service Interface(s)
Interface number(s) on the U2000
TND1EM8F OUT1 IN1 to OUT8IN8
D1EM8F-1(PORT-1) to D1EM8F-8(PORT-8)
TND1EM8T FE/GE1 to FE/GE8 D1EM8T-1(PORT-1) to D1EM8T-8(PORT-8)
TND1EM4F OUT1 IN1 to OUT4IN4
D1EM4F-1(PORT-1) to D1EM4F-4(PORT-4)
TND1EM4T FE/GE1 to FE/GE4 D1EM4T-1(PORT-1) to D1EM4T-4(PORT-4)
TND2AQ1 OUT1 IN1 to OUT4IN4
D2AQ1-1(PORT-1) to D2AQ1-4(PORT-4)
TND1SQ1 OUT1 IN1 to OUT4IN4
D1SQ1-1(PORT-1) to D1SQ1-4(PORT-4)
TND1CQ1B OUT1 IN1 to OUT4IN4
D1CQ1B-1(PORT-1) to D1CQ1B-4(PORT-4)
TND3ML1A E1 (1 to 16) D3ML1A-1(PORT-1) to D3ML1A-16(PORT-16)
TND3ML1B E1 (1 to 16) D3ML1B-1(PORT-1) to D3ML1B-16(PORT-16)
TND2MD1A 1. E1 (1 to 16)2. E1 (17 to 32)
1. D2MD1A-1(PORT-1) to D2MD1A-16(PORT-16)
2. D2MD1A-17(PORT-17) to D2MD1A-32(PORT-32)
TND2MD1B 1. E1 (1 to 16)2. E1 (17 to 32)
1. D2MD1B-1(PORT-1) to D2MD1B-16(PORT-16)
2. D2MD1B-17(PORT-17) to D2MD1B-32(PORT-32)
3.4 Differences Between System Control BoardsThis topic describes the differences between system control boards for the OptiX PTN 960.
Table 3-4 shows the differences between system control boards for the OptiX PTN 960.
Table 3-4 Differences between system control boards
Aspect TND3CXPA TND3CXPB
Cross-connectcapacity 44 Gbit/s 56 Gbit/s
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
Aspect TND3CXPA TND3CXPB
Packet processingcapability 65.48 Mbit/s 83.33 Mbit/s
Maximum number of10GE opticalinterfaces
2 4
Interface boards The TND1EX1 board can beinstalled in slot 5 or 6.
The TND1EX1 board can beinstalled in any of slots 3 to 6.
3.5 TND3CXPAThis section describes the CXPA, which is the system control, cross-connect and protocolprocessing board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, andtechnical specifications.
3.5.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CXPA is TND3.
3.5.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CXPA controls the system, grooms services, processes the clock, and provides auxiliaryinterfaces.
Table 3-5 lists the functions and features of the CXPA.
Table 3-5 Functions and Features of the CXPA
Function and Feature Description
Basic funtion Cross-connect capacity: 44 Gbit/s
Supports switching, control, and clock management.
Supports the board-level 1+1 backup function.
APS Supports MPLS Tunnel APS.Supports 1:1 PW APS with dual-ended switching.
OAM l ETH Service OAMl ETH Port OAMl MPLS-TP OAMl MPLS OAM
Auxiliary interface function Provides one Ethernet NM interface/NM serial interface forcommunication with the NMS.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
Function and Feature Description
Provides one time input/output interface and provides thesynchronization time source for the equipment.This interface can also be used as a common interface forinputting and outputting AC power input monitoring signalsfor the EPS30-4815 power supply system.
Provides one clock input/output interface and provides thesynchronization clock source for the equipment.
Provides one alarm input/output interface. The interface isreserved for later use.
Tact switches Provides two tact switches. When you rotate the ejector leversto remove the board, the two tact switches are triggered tostart the active/standby protection switching.
NOTEWhen you rotate only one ejector lever, the protection switching is not triggered. The protection switchingis triggered only when you rotate the two ejector levers.
The clock interface on the working CXPA is independent to the one on the standby CXPA. The interfacescan provide two channels of clock input/output signals.
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe CXPA mainly consists of the service processing and grooming module, system controlmodule, clock processing module, auxiliary interface module, and power supply module.
Figure 3-2 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the CXPA.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
Figure 3-2 Block diagram for the working principle of the CXPA
Auxiliary interface module
Time input/output interface
NM network interface/serial interface
Alarm input/output interface
Clock processing
module
System control module
Service processing and grooming
module
NM communication
Service signals
Power supply module
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
12 V
3.3 V
Backplane
System power supply
FANInterface Boards
Under-voltage/over-voltage detection bus
CPU control unit
Logic control unit
NM serial interface
Active/standby board
communication bus
Time/clock signals
Management bus
Management bus
Time/clock signals
Time/clock signals
The other CXPA
Service communication bus
The other CXPA
The other CXPA
NM pass-through
Interface boards
Interface boards
Time/clock signals
Clock Signal
System power supply
Clock input/output interface
CF card
Service Processing and Grooming Module
This module performs the following functions:
l Grooms services with 44 Gbit/s switching capacity.
l Supports automatic switching and manual switching of the active and standby boards.
System Control Module
This module performs the following functions:
l The CPU control unit works with the logic control unit to detects alarms and hardwarefaults, control boards, process overhead, and manage the equipment.
l The logic control unit provides interfaces through which the CPU control unit connects toother chips on the board. The logic control unit specifies the working states of chips,initializes chips, and operates the register. In addition, the logic control unit achieves logcontrol on active/standby switching, monitors the working state of the board, and detectsthe states of other boards.
l Provides a pluggable CF card. Main functions of the CF card are as follows:
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
– Software package storage: During an NE upgrade in the package loading mode, the CFcard is used to store the software package used for the upgrade.
– Data backup: The NE logs and database are periodically backed up from the FLASHchip to the CF card for fault recovery.
– Configuration restoration: If the CF RCV button is pressed down for 5s, configurationinformation in the CF card can be automatically restored to the device.
Clock Processing ModuleThis module performs the following functions:
l Provides working clock signals for the key chips on the CXPA.l Supports the physical-layer clock synchronization, and provides system clock signals for
each boards.l Processes the IEEE 1588V2 protocol to achieve clock/time synchronization.
Auxiliary Interface ModuleThis module performs the following functions:
l Provides one NM Ethernet interface or NM serial interface.l Provides one time input/output interface and one time input/output interface.l Provides one alarm input/output interface.
Power Supply ModuleThis module performs the following functions:
l Accesses two -48 V DC/-60 V DC power supplies.l Detects and reports overvoltage and undervoltage of two input power supplies.l Supplies 12 V power for the FAN board.l Supplies 3.3 V working power for the local board and the other boards in a centralized
manner.
3.5.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the CXPA, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.
Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 3-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CXPA.
Figure 3-3 Front panel of the CXPA
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the CXPA:
l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
l PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program
l SYNC indicator, red or green, which indicates the clock synchronization status
l ACTX indicator, green, which indicates the cross-connection or clock active/standby status
l ACTC indicator, green, which indicates the active/standby system control board
For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.
Button
The following buttons are present on the front panel of the CXPA:
l CF RCV button, which is reserved for later use.
l RST button, which is used for warm reset on the board. When you press the RST buttonand then release it, the board is reset (warm). When the active SCC board is reset, active/standby switchover will be triggered and services will be switched in 50 ms.
l LAMP button, which is used to test the indicators. When you press the LAMP button, allthe board indicators on the NE are on.
Switch for the Ejector Lever
On the front panel, there are two switches for the two ejector levers on the front panel. To removea board, you need to push the two switches to the middle and then rotate the ejector levers.
Interface
Table 3-6 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPATable 3-6.
Table 3-6 Types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPA
Interfaceon theFrontPanel
InterfaceType
Usage Pin Corresponding Cable
ETH/OAM
RJ-45 Ethernet NM interface or NMserial interface
For details,seeTable 3-7.
For details,see7.6ManagementCables.
CLK RJ-45 Clock input/output interface For details,seeTable 3-9 andTable 3-10.
For details,see7.7 ClockCables.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
Interfaceon theFrontPanel
InterfaceType
Usage Pin Corresponding Cable
TOD RJ-45 Time input/output interfaceTOD can also be used as acommon interface forinputting and outputting ACpower input monitoringsignals for the EPS30-4815power supply system.
For details,see7.7 ClockCables.
ALMI/ALMO
RJ-45 Alarm input/output interface For details,seeTable 3-11.
For details,see7.8 AlarmInput/OutputCables.
NOTECLK and TOD interfaces on active and standby system control boards can be used as time/clock interfacesor power alarm monitoring interfaces. For each NE, only one CLK/TOD interface can be configured tomonitor power alarms. When the CLK or TOD interface is used as an input/output interface for monitoringsignals, you need to modify Interface Type on the U2000. For details on how to modify InterfaceType on the U2000, see Setting the Attributes of the External Time Interface in the OptiX PTN 960 PacketTransport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide.
Table 3-7 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Usage
18 24 3567
1 Transmit positive of the NM interface
2 Transmit negative of the NM interface
3 Receive positive of the NM interface
4 Grounding end of the NM serial interface
5 Receive end of the NM serial interface
6 Receive negative of the NM interface
7 Unspecified
8 Transmit end of the NM serial interface
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
Table 3-8 Pins of the CLK
Front View Pin Usage
18 24 3567
1 Negative receive end of CLK
2 Positive receive end of CLK
3 Unspecified
4 Positive transmit end of CLK
5 Negative transmit end of CLK
6 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Table 3-9 Pins of the TOD (External Time Mode)
Front View Pin Working Mode
External TimeInput(1PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeOutput(1PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeInput(DCLS)
External TimeOutput(DCLS)
18 24 3567
1 Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified
2 Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified
3 Negative inputfor the 1ppssignal(RS422 level)
Negative outputfor the 1ppssignal(RS422 level)
Negative inputfor the DCLStime signal(RS422 level)
Negative outputfor the DCLStime signal(RS422 level)
4 Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end
5 Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end
6 Positive input forthe 1pps signal(RS422 level)
Negative outputfor timeinformation(RS422 level)
Positive input forthe DCLS timesignal(RS422 level)
Positive outputfor the DCLStime signal(RS422 level)
7 Negative inputfor timeinformation(RS422 level)
Negative outputfor timeinformation(RS422 level)
Unspecified Unspecified
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
Front View Pin Working Mode
External TimeInput(1PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeOutput(1PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeInput(DCLS)
External TimeOutput(DCLS)
8 Positive input fortime information(RS422 level)
Positive outputfor timeinformation(RS422 level)
Unspecified Unspecified
NOTEThe TOD interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding four working modes.
Table 3-10 Pins of the TOD (Alarm Monitoring Mode)
Front View Pin Usage
18 24 3567
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
3 Transmit negative
4 Grounding end
5 Grounding end
6 Transmit positive
7 Receive negative
8 Receive positive
Table 3-11 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Front View Pin Usage
18 24 3567
1 Alarm input 1
2 Grounding end for alarm input 1
3 Alarm input 2
4 Alarm input 3
5 Grounding end for alarm input 3
6 Grounding end for alarm input 2
7 Positive for critical or major alarm signal output
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
Front View Pin Usage
8 Negative for critical or major alarm signal output
3.5.5 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the CXPA.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the CXPA.
l Ethernet interfacel External time interfacel Phase-locked source output by External clock
External time interface
For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.
3.5.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the CXPA include board dimensions, weight, and powerconsumption.
Board dimensions (mm): 22.86 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W)
Weight (kg): 0.68
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 27.3
3.6 TND3CXPBThis section describes the CXPB, which is the system control, cross-connect and protocolprocessing board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, andtechnical specifications.
3.6.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CXPB is TND3.
3.6.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CXPB controls the system, grooms services, processes the clock, and provides auxiliaryinterfaces.
Table 3-12 lists the functions and features of the CXPB.
Table 3-12 Functions and Features of the CXPB
Function and Feature Description
Basic funtion Cross-connect capacity: 56 Gbit/s
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
Function and Feature Description
Supports switching, control, and clock management.
Supports the board-level 1+1 backup function.
APS Supports MPLS Tunnel APS.Supports 1:1 PW APS with dual-ended switching.
OAM l ETH Service OAMl ETH Port OAMl MPLS-TP OAMl MPLS OAM
Auxiliary interface function Provides one Ethernet NM interface/NM serial interface forcommunication with the NMS.
Provides one time input/output interface and provides thesynchronization time source for the equipment.This interface can also be used as a common interface forinputting and outputting AC power input monitoring signalsfor the EPS30-4815 power supply system.
Provides one clock input/output interface and provides thesynchronization clock source for the equipment.
Provides one alarm input/output interface. The interface isreserved for later use.
Tact switches Provides two tact switches. When you rotate the ejector leversto remove the board, the two tact switches are triggered tostart the active/standby protection switching.
NOTEWhen you rotate only one ejector lever, the protection switching is not triggered. The protection switchingis triggered only when you rotate the two ejector levers.
The clock interface on the working CXPB is independent to the one on the standby CXPB. The interfacescan provide two channels of clock input/output signals.
3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe CXPB mainly consists of the service processing and grooming module, system controlmodule, clock processing module, auxiliary interface module, and power supply module.
Figure 3-4 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the CXPB.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
Figure 3-4 Block diagram for the working principle of the CXPB
Auxiliary interface module
Time input/output interface
NM network interface/serial interface
Alarm input/output interface
Clock processing
module
System control module
Service processing and grooming
module
NM communication
Service signals
Power supply module
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
12 V
3.3 V
Backplane
System power supply
FANInterface Boards
Under-voltage/over-voltage detection bus
CPU control unit
Logic control unit
NM serial interface
Active/standby board
communication bus
Time/clock signals
Management bus
Management bus
Time/clock signals
Time/clock signals
The other CXPB
Service communication bus
The other CXPB
The other CXPB
NM pass-through
Interface boards
Interface boards
Time/clock signals
Clock Signal
System power supply
Clock input/output interface
CF card
Service Processing and Grooming Module
This module performs the following functions:
l Grooms services with 56 Gbit/s switching capacity.
l Supports automatic switching and manual switching of the active and standby boards.
System Control Module
This module performs the following functions:
l The CPU control unit works with the logic control unit to detects alarms and hardwarefaults, control boards, process overhead, and manage the equipment.
l The logic control unit provides interfaces through which the CPU control unit connects toother chips on the board. The logic control unit specifies the working states of chips,initializes chips, and operates the register. In addition, the logic control unit achieves logcontrol on active/standby switching, monitors the working state of the board, and detectsthe states of other boards.
l Provides a pluggable CF card. Main functions of the CF card are as follows:
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
– Software package storage: During an NE upgrade in the package loading mode, the CFcard is used to store the software package used for the upgrade.
– Data backup: The NE logs and database are periodically backed up from the FLASHchip to the CF card for fault recovery.
– Configuration restoration: If the CF RCV button is pressed down for 5s, configurationinformation in the CF card can be automatically restored to the device.
Clock Processing Module
This module performs the following functions:
l Provides working clock signals for the key chips on the CXPB.
l Supports the physical-layer clock synchronization, and provides system clock signals foreach boards.
l Processes the IEEE 1588V2 protocol to achieve clock/time synchronization.
l Supports the 1588 ACR clock.
Auxiliary Interface Module
This module performs the following functions:
l Provides one NM Ethernet interface or NM serial interface.
l Provides one time input/output interface and one time input/output interface.
l Provides one alarm input/output interface.
Power Supply Module
This module performs the following functions:
l Accesses two -48 V DC/-60 V DC power supplies.
l Detects and reports overvoltage and undervoltage of two input power supplies.
l Supplies 12 V power for the FAN board.
l Supplies 3.3 V working power for the local board and the other boards in a centralizedmanner.
3.6.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the CXPB, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 3-5 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CXPB.
Figure 3-5 Front panel of the CXPB
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the CXPB:
l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
l PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program
l SYNC indicator, red or green, which indicates the clock synchronization status
l ACTX indicator, green, which indicates the cross-connection or clock active/standby status
l ACTC indicator, green, which indicates the active/standby system control board
For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.
Button
The following buttons are present on the front panel of the CXPB:
l CF RCV button, which is reserved for later use.
l RST button, which is used for warm reset on the board. When you press the RST buttonand then release it, the board is reset (warm). When the active SCC board is reset, active/standby switchover will be triggered and services will be switched in 50 ms.
l LAMP button, which is used to test the indicators. When you press the LAMP button, allthe board indicators on the NE are on.
Switch for the Ejector Lever
On the front panel, there are two switches for the two ejector levers on the front panel. To removea board, you need to push the two switches to the middle and then rotate the ejector levers.
Interface
Table 3-13 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPBTable 3-13.
Table 3-13 Types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPB
Interfaceon theFrontPanel
InterfaceType
Usage Pin Corresponding Cable
ETH/OAM
RJ-45 Ethernet NM interface or NMserial interface
For details,seeTable 3-14.
For details,see7.6ManagementCables.
CLK RJ-45 Time input/output interfaceCommon interface forinputting and outputting theAC power input monitoring
For details,seeTable 3-16and Table 3-17.
For details,see7.7 ClockCables.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
Interfaceon theFrontPanel
InterfaceType
Usage Pin Corresponding Cable
TOD RJ-45 signals for the EPS30–4815power supply system
For details,see7.7 ClockCables.
ALMI/ALMO
RJ-45 Alarm input/output interface For details,seeTable 3-18.
For details,see7.8 AlarmInput/OutputCables.
NOTECLK and TOD interfaces on active and standby system control boards can be used as time/clock interfacesor power alarm monitoring interfaces. For each NE, only one CLK/TOD interface can be configured tomonitor power alarms. When the CLK or TOD interface is used as an input/output interface for monitoringsignals, you need to modify Interface Type on the U2000. For details on how to modify InterfaceType on the U2000, see Setting the Attributes of the External Time Interface in the OptiX PTN 960 PacketTransport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide.
Table 3-14 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Usage
18 24 3567
1 Transmit positive of the NM interface
2 Transmit negative of the NM interface
3 Receive positive of the NM interface
4 Grounding end of the NM serial interface
5 Receive end of the NM serial interface
6 Receive negative of the NM interface
7 Unspecified
8 Transmit end of the NM serial interface
Table 3-15 Pins of the CLK
Front View Pin Usage
18 24 3567
1 Negative receive end of CLK
2 Positive receive end of CLK
3 Unspecified
4 Positive transmit end of CLK
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
Front View Pin Usage
5 Negative transmit end of CLK
6 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Table 3-16 Pins of the TOD
Front View Pin Working Mode
External TimeInput(1PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeOutput(1PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeInput(DCLS)
External TimeOutput(DCLS)
18 24 3567
1 Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified
2 Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified
3 Negative inputfor the 1ppssignal(RS422 level)
Negative outputfor the 1ppssignal(RS422 level)
Negative inputfor the DCLStime signal(RS422 level)
Negative outputfor the DCLStime signal(RS422 level)
4 Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end
5 Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end
6 Positive input forthe 1pps signal(RS422 level)
Negative outputfor timeinformation(RS422 level)
Positive input forthe DCLS timesignal(RS422 level)
Positive outputfor the DCLStime signal(RS422 level)
7 Negative inputfor timeinformation(RS422 level)
Negative outputfor timeinformation(RS422 level)
Unspecified Unspecified
8 Positive input fortime information(RS422 level)
Positive outputfor timeinformation(RS422 level)
Unspecified Unspecified
NOTEThe TOD interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding four working modes.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
Table 3-17 Pins of the CLK or TOD (Alarm Monitoring Mode)
Front View Pin Usage
18 24 3567
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
3 Transmit negative
4 Grounding end
5 Grounding end
6 Transmit positive
7 Receive negative
8 Receive positive
Table 3-18 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Front View Pin Usage
18 24 3567
1 Alarm input 1
2 Grounding end for alarm input 1
3 Alarm input 2
4 Alarm input 3
5 Grounding end for alarm input 3
6 Grounding end for alarm input 2
7 Positive for critical or major alarm signal output
8 Negative for critical or major alarm signal output
3.6.5 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the CXPB.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the CXPB.
l Ethernet interface
l External time interface
l Phase-locked source output by External clock
External time interface
For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
3.6.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the CXPB include board dimensions, weight, and powerconsumption.
Board dimensions (mm): 22.86 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W)
Weight (kg): 0.68
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 27.3
3.7 TND1EX1This section describes the EX1, which is an interface board with one 10GE optical interfaces,in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technicalspecifications.
3.7.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EX1 is TND1.
3.7.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EX1 mainly accesses one 10 GE signals.
Table 3-19 lists the functions and features of the EX1.
Table 3-19 Functions and Features of the EX1
Function andFeature
Description
Basic function Supports one 10GE optical or electrical interfaces.
Supports the hot swappable function.
Detects the temperature and voltage of the board.
DCN Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function is enabled.In addition, this function can be disabled or enabled manually.
Interface function Working mode Auto-Negotiation, 10G Full-Duplex LAN
Type of the loopback at the port PHY-layer inloopMAC-layer inloop and outloop
Automatic loopback release atthe port
Supported
Collection of bandwidthutilization statistics at a port
Supported
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
Function andFeature
Description
LAG Intra-board LAG supported Supported
Inter-board LAG supported Supported
Black list and whitelist of MAC addresses
Supported
Clock Synchronous Ethernet Supported
SSM protocol Supported
IEEE 1588V2 protocol Supported
1588 ACR clock (unicast andmulticast)
Supported
3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe EX1 mainly consists of the interface conversion module, control driving module, clockmodule, and power supply module.
Figure 3-6 shows the block diagram for the functions of the EX1.
Figure 3-6 Block diagram for the functions of the EX1
CXPService access
module
Clock module
Service processing
module
Management module
1 x 10 GE signals Service signalsService signals
Management bus
Management bus
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
3.3 V
1.2 V
System power supplyPower supply
module
Backplane
Clock signalsManagement bus
Clock signals
CXP
CXP
5.0 V
2.5 VEach module on the boardSystem power
supply
Transmit Direction
The service packets from CXP are sent to the service processing module through the backplane-side interface of the EX1. The service processing module identifies the destination interfacesfor the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then, the service processing modulesends the processed packets to the service access module, where coding/decoding, serial/parallel
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
conversion, and E/O conversion are performed. Finally, the service access module outputs thepackets through the 10 GE interfaces on the front panel.
Receive Direction
The 10 GE interfaces on the front panel receive 10 GE service signals. Then, the service accessmodule performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding on theservices, and then sends the services to the service processing module. The service processingmodule buffers and schedules the service packets, and finally outputs the packets through thebackplane-side interface.
Service Access Module
This module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module receives the 10 GE services from the interfaces on thefront panel, performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding, andthen sends the services to the service processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets from the serviceprocessing module, performs coding/decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and E/Oconversion on the packets, and then outputs the packets through the 10 GE interfaces onthe front panel.
Service Processing Module
This module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module receives and buffers the service packets from theinterface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from differentinterfaces. Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives service packets from the CXP, identifies thedestination interfaces of the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Finally, thismodule outputs the packets to the service access module.
l This module extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock.
l This module extracts and inserts IEEE 1588 V2 packets.
Management Module
This module is used with the CXP to manage and control each module on this board.
Clock module
This module performs the following functions:
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EX1.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet and the SSM protocol.
l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol.
l Supports the 1588 ACR clock.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
Power Supply Module
This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on theEX1.
l 5.0V
l 3.3V
l 1.8V
l 1.2V
3.7.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the EX1, there are indicators and interfaces.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 3-7 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EX1.
Figure 3-7 Front panel of the EX1
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EX1.
l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
l SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
l L/A indicator, green or orange, which indicate the port connection and data receiving/transmitting status
For details on indications of indicators, see B Indicators.
Interfaces
One XFP interface is present on the EX1. Table 3-20 lists types and usage of the opticalinterfaces. For details on the fibers corresponding to the interfaces, see 7.1 Fibers.
Table 3-20 Types and usage of the interfaces on the EX1
Interface onthe FrontPanel
InterfaceType
Usage
IN LC Receives 10GE optical signals.
OUT LC Transmits 10GE optical signals.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
Interface onthe FrontPanel
InterfaceType
Usage
Note 1: The XFP interface should be used with an optical module.Note 2: Two LC interfaces are provided on the left and right sides of the optical module. Eachinterface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receive service signals.
3.7.5 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the TND1EX1.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EX1.
l Ethernet interface
l Automatic Laser Shutdown
l Optical Power Management
For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.
3.7.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the EX1 include the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.
Table 3-21 lists the specifications of physical the EX1.
Table 3-21 Technical specifications of the 10GE optical interface
Item Specification
Opticalinterfacetype
Two-fiber bidirectional interface
10GBASE-L(10km)
10GBASE-E(40km)
10GBASE-Z(80km)
10GBASE-CWDM(70km)
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Workingwavelengthrange (nm)
1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 For details, seeRelated opticalmodule partnumbers of10GBASE-CWDM opticalinterfaces andrelated opticalmodule meanlaunched opticalpower, receiver
Meanlaunchedoptical power(dBm)
-8.2 to 0.5 -4.7 to 4 0 to 4
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
Item Specification
Opticalinterfacetype
Two-fiber bidirectional interface
10GBASE-L(10km)
10GBASE-E(40km)
10GBASE-Z(80km)
10GBASE-CWDM(70km)
Receiversensitivity(dBm)
-14.4 -15.8 -24 sensitivity andwavelengthallocation.
Minimumoverload(dBm)
0.5 -1 -7 -9
Minimumextinctionratio (dB)
3.5 3 3 8.2
Opticalmodule partnumber
34060313 34060322 34060361 For details, seeRelated opticalmodule partnumbers of10GBASE-CWDM opticalinterfaces andrelated opticalmodule meanlaunched opticalpower, receiversensitivity andwavelengthallocation.
NOTEFor details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W)
Weight (kg): 0.48
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 13.1
3.8 TND1EM8FThis section describes the EM8F, which is an interface board with eight FE/GE optical interfaces,in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technicalspecifications.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
3.8.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EM8F is TND1.
3.8.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EM8F mainly accesses 8 x FE/GE optical signals, and processes the services with theTND3CXPA/TND3CXPB.
Table 3-22lists the functions and features of the EM8F.
Table 3-22 Functions and features of the EM8F
Function andFeature
Description
Basic function Supports four FE/GE optical interfaces. Accesses 8 x FE/GE opticalsignals, and processes the services with the TND3CXPA/TND3CXPB.
Supports the hot swappable function.
Detects the temperature and voltage of the board.
DCN Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function is enabled atthe first four ports. In addition, this function can be disabled or enabledmanually.
Interface function Working mode Auto-Negotiation, 100M Full–Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex
Type of the loopback at the port PHY-layer outloopMAC-layer inloop and outloop
Automatic loopback release at theport
Supported
LAG Inter-board LAG Supported
Intra-board LAG Supported
Black list and whitelist of MACaddresses
Supported
Clock Synchronous Ethernet Supported
SSM protocol Supported
IEEE 1588V2 protocol Supported
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe EM8F mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clockmodule, and power supply module.
Figure 3-8shows the block diagram for the functions of the EM8F.
Figure 3-8 Block diagram for the functions of the EM8F
CXPService access
module
Clock module
Service processing
module
Management module
8 x FE/GE signals Service signalsService signals
Management bus
Management bus
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
3.3 V
1.8 V
System power supplyPower supply
module
Backplane
Clock signalsManagement bus
Clock signals
CXP
CXP
3.0 V2.5 VEach module on the board
System power supply
1.2 V
Transmit DirectionThe service packets from CXP are sent to the service processing module through the backplane-side interface of the EM8F. The service processing module identifies the destination interfacesfor the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then, the service processing modulesends the processed packets to the service access module, where coding/decoding, serial/parallelconversion, and E/O conversion are performed. Finally, the service access module outputs thepackets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.
Receive DirectionThe GE/FE interfaces on the front panel receive GE/FE service signals. Then, the service accessmodule performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding on theservices, and then sends the services to the service processing module. The service processingmodule buffers the service packets, schedules the packets based on the service access capabilityof the EM8F and the access bandwidth setting at each interface, and finally outputs the packetsthrough the backplane-side interface.
Service Access ModuleThis module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module receives the GE/FE services from the interfaces on thefront panel, performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding, andthen sends the services to the service processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets from the serviceprocessing module, performs coding/decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and E/O
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
conversion on the packets, and then outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces onthe front panel.
Service Processing Module
This module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module receives and buffers the service packets from theinterface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from different interfacesbased on the access capability of the EM8F and the access bandwidth settings at theseinterfaces. Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives service packets from the CXP, identifies thedestination interfaces of the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets based on theaccess capability of the EM8F and the access bandwidth setting at each interface. Finally,this module outputs the packets to the service access module.
l This module extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock.
l This module extracts and inserts IEEE 1588 V2 packets.
Management Module
This module is used with the CXP to manage and control each module on the EM8F.
Clock Module
This module performs the following functions:
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EM8F.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet and SSM protocols.
l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol.
Power Supply Module
This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EM8F.
l 3.3V
l 3.0V
l 2.5V
l 1.8V
l 1.2V
3.8.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the EM8F, there are indicators and interfaces.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 3-9shows the appearance of the front panel of the EM8F.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
Figure 3-9 Font panel of the EM8F
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EM8F.
l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
l SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
l L/A1 to L/A8 indicators, green or orange, which indicate the port connection status anddata transmit/receive status
For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.
Interfaces
Eight SFP interfaces are present on the EM8F. Table 3-23 and Table 3-24 list the types andusage of the interfaces.
Table 3-23 Interfaces of the EM8F
Interface on the FrontPanel
InterfaceType
Usage CorrespondingFiber
Opticalinterface
IN1 to IN8 LC When a two-fiber bidirectionaloptical module is used, thisinterface is used as an inputinterface for the GE optical signal.When a single-fiber bidirectionaloptical module is used, thisinterface is not used.
For details,see 7.1Fibers.
OUT1 toOUT8
LC When a two-fiber bidirectionaloptical module is used, thisinterface is used as an outputinterface for the GE/FE opticalsignal.When a single-fiber bidirectionaloptical module is used, thisinterface is used as an input/outputinterface for the GE/FE opticalsignal.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
Interface on the FrontPanel
InterfaceType
Usage CorrespondingFiber
Electricalinterface
OUT1 IN1 toOUT8 IN8
RJ45 Input/Output interfaces for GE/FEelectrical signals
For details,see 7.5.1EthernetCables.
NOTEThe GE SFP interface can function as either an optical interface or an electrical interface.
When the SFP interface functions as an optical interface, it need to be used with an optical module.
l When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, two LC interfaces are provided on the left andright sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receiveservice signals.
l When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, only one LC interface is provided on the leftside of the optical module. This optical interface uses only one fiber, which is used to transmit andreceive service signals at the same time.
When the SFP interface functions as an electrical interface, it need to be used with an electrical module.
Table 3-24 Pins of the GE electrical module
Front View Pin Usage
18 24 3567
1 Positive of twisted pair cable 1
2 Negative of twisted pair cable 1
3 Positive of twisted pair cable 2
4 Positive of twisted pair cable 3
5 Negative of twisted pair cable 3
6 Negative of twisted pair cable 2
7 Positive of twisted pair cable 4
8 Negative of twisted pair cable 4
3.8.5 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set the parameter for the EM8F.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EM8F.
l Ethernet interfacel Automatic Laser Shutdownl Optical Power Management
For details on the parameter, see F Board Configuration Parameters.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
3.8.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the EM8F include the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.
Table 3-25 lists the specifications of the GE interfaces on the TND1EM8F; Table 3-28 lists thespecifications of the SFP interface with an electrical module.
Table 3-29 lists the specifications of the FE interfaces on the TND1EM8F.
Table 3-25 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface
Item Specification
Opticalinterface type
Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectionalinterface
1000BASE-SX(0.5km)
1000BASE-LX(10km)
1000BASE-VX(40km)
1000BASE-ZX(80 km)
1000BASE-X(100km)
1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)
1000BASE-BX(10 km)
1000BASE-BX(40 km)
1000BASE-BX(80 km)
Fibertype
Multi-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Workingwavelengthrange(nm)
770 to860
1270 to1355
1260 to1360
1500 to1580
1500 to1580
Fordetails,seewavelengthallocation of1000BASE-CWDMopticalinterfaces andrelatedopticalmodulecode.
For details, see wavelengthallocation of 1000BASE-BXoptical interfaces and relatedoptical module code.
Meanlaunchedopticalpower(dBm)
-9.5 to 0 -11 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 5 -9 to -3 -3 to 3 -2 to 4
Receiversensitivity (dBm)
-17 -19 -23 -23 -30 -28 -19.5 -23 -26
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
Item Specification
Opticalinterface type
Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectionalinterface
1000BASE-SX(0.5km)
1000BASE-LX(10km)
1000BASE-VX(40km)
1000BASE-ZX(80 km)
1000BASE-X(100km)
1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)
1000BASE-BX(10 km)
1000BASE-BX(40 km)
1000BASE-BX(80 km)
Minimumoverload(dBm)
0 -3 -3 -3 -10 -9 -3 -3 -3
Minimumextinction ratio(dB)
9 9 9 9 9 8.2 6 9 9
Opticalmodulecode
34060286
34060473
34060298
34060360
34060295
Fordetails,seewavelengthallocation of1000BASE-CWDMopticalinterfaces andrelatedopticalmodulecode.
For details, see wavelengthallocation of 1000BASE-BXoptical interfaces and relatedoptical module code.
NOTEFor details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.
Table 3-26 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module code
SN Optical modulecode
Wavelength (nm) SN Opticalmodule code
Wavelength (nm)
1 34060483 1464.5 to 1477.5 5 34060478 1544.5 to 1557.5
2 34060481 1484.5 to 1497.5 6 34060476 1564.5 to 1577.5
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
SN Optical modulecode
Wavelength (nm) SN Opticalmodule code
Wavelength (nm)
3 34060479 1504.5 to 1517.5 7 34060477 1584.5 to 1597.5
4 34060482 1524.5 to 1537.5 8 34060480 1604.5 to 1617.5
Table 3-27 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code
Item Local Remote Item Local Remote
Optical modulecode
34060470(10 km)
34060475(10 km)
Optical modulecode
34060595(80km)
34060596(80km)
34060539(40 km)
34060540(40 km)
Transmitterwavelength(nm)
1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 Transmitterwavelength(nm)
1560 to 1580 1480 to 1500
Receiverwavelength(nm)
1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 Receiverwavelength(nm)
1480 to 1500 1560 to 1580
Table 3-28 Interface specifications of the GE electrical module
Item Specification
Interface rate 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s
RJ-45 electrical interfacespecification
Complies with IEEE 802.3.
Table 3-29 Performance specifications of the FE optical interface
Item Specification
Optical interfacetype
Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectional interface
100BASE-FX(15 km)
100BASE-FX(40 km)
100BASE-FX(80 km)
100BASE-BX(10 km)
100BASE-BX(40 km)
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
Item Specification
Workingwavelengthrange (nm)
1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580 For details, seewavelengthallocation of100BASE-BXopticalinterfaces andrelated opticalmodule code.
For details, seewavelengthallocation of100BASE-BXopticalinterfaces andrelated opticalmodule code.
Mean launchedoptical power(dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -15 to -8 -3 to 2
Receiversensitivity(dBm)
-28 -34 -34 -28.2 -24
Minimumoverload (dBm)
-8 -10 -10 -8 -3
Minimumextinction ratio(dB)
8.2 10 10 6.6 8
Optical modulecode
34060276 34060281 34060282 For details, seewavelengthallocation of100BASE-BXopticalinterfaces andrelated opticalmodule code.
For details, seewavelengthallocation of100BASE-BXopticalinterfaces andrelated opticalmodule code.
NOTEFor details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.
Table 3-30 Wavelength allocation of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code
Item Local Remote
Optical module code(10 km)
34060363 34060364
Optical module code(40 km)
34060638 34060639
Transmitter wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Receiver wavelength (nm) 1480 to 1580 1260 to 1360
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
Item Local Remote
Note: FE/STM–1 optical modules 34060638 and 34060639 can also support 1000 Mbit/s rate.
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W)
Weight (kg): 0.56
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 18.9
3.9 TND1EM8TThis section describes the EM8T, which is an interface board with eight FE/GE electricalinterfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, andtechnical specifications.
3.9.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EM8T is TND1.
3.9.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EM8T mainly accesses 8 x FE/GE electrical signals, and processes the services with theCXP.
Table 3-31lists the functions and features of the EM8T.
Table 3-31 Functions and features of the EM8T
Function andFeature
Description
Basic function Supports four FE/GE electrical interfaces. Accesses 8 x FE/GEelectrical signals, and processes the services with the CXP.
Supports the hot swappable function.
Detects the temperature and voltage of the board.
DCN Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function is enabled atthe first four ports. In addition, this function can be disabled or enabledmanually.
Interface function Working mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M Full–Duplex, 100M Full–Duplex,1000M Full-Duplex
Type of the loopback at the port PHY-layer outloopMAC-layer inloop and outloop
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
Function andFeature
Description
Automatic loopback release at theport
Supported
LAG Inter-board LAG Supported
Intra-board LAG Supported
Black list and whitelist of MACaddresses
Supported
Clock Synchronous Ethernet Supported
SSM protocol Supported
IEEE 1588V2 protocol Supported
Note: When the interfaces on the front panel work in 10 Mbit/s mode, synchronous Ethernetand IEEE 1588V2 protocol are not applicable.
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe EM8T mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clockmodule, and power supply module.
Figure 3-10shows the block diagram for the functions of the EM8T.
Figure 3-10 Block diagram for the functions of the EM8T
CXPService access
module
Clock module
Service processing
module
Management module
8 x FE/GE signals Service signalsService signals
Management bus
Management bus
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
3.3 V
1.8 V
System power supplyPower supply
module
Backplane
Clock signalsManagement bus
Clock signals
CXP
CXP
3.0 V2.5 VEach module on the board
System power supply
1.2 V
Transmit DirectionThe service packets from CXP are sent to the service processing module through the backplane-side interface of the EM8T. The service processing module identifies the destination interfaces
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
for the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then, the service processing modulesends the processed packets to the service access module, where coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion are performed. Finally, the service access module outputs the packets throughthe GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.
Receive Direction
The GE/FE interfaces on the front panel receive GE/FE service signals. Then, the service accessmodule performs serial/parallel conversion and coding/decoding on the services, and then sendsthe services to the service processing module. The service processing module buffers the servicepackets, schedules the packets based on the service access capability of the EM8T and the accessbandwidth setting at each interface, and finally outputs the packets through the backplane-sideinterface.
Service Access Module
This module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module receives the GE/FE services from the interfaces on thefront panel, performs serial/parallel conversion and coding/decoding, and then sends theservices to the service processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets from the serviceprocessing module, performs coding/decoding, and serial/parallel conversion on thepackets, and then outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.
Service Processing Module
This module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module receives and buffers the service packets from theinterface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from different interfacesbased on the access capability of the EM8T and the access bandwidth settings at theseinterfaces. Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives service packets from the CXP, identifies thedestination interfaces of the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets based on theaccess capability of the EM8T and the access bandwidth setting at each interface. Finally,this module outputs the packets to the service access module.
l This module extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock.
l This module extracts and inserts IEEE 1588 V2 packets.
Management Module
This module is used with the CXP to manage and control each module on the EM8T.
Clock Module
This module performs the following functions:
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EM8T.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet and SSM protocols.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol.
Power Supply Module
This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EM8T.
l 3.3V
l 3.0V
l 2.5V
l 1.8V
l 1.2V
3.9.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the EM8T, there are indicators and interfaces.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 3-11shows the appearance of the front panel of the EM8T.
Figure 3-11 Font panel of the EM8T
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EM8T.
l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
l SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
NOTE
Above each service interface, there is a service port connection status indicator (LINK) and a service porttransmit/receive status indicator (ACT).
For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.
Interfaces
On the EM8T, eight interfaces are present. Table 3-32 lists the quantity, types, and usage of theinterfaces. The interfaces support auto-adaptation in the case of straight-through cables orcrossover cables. For corresponding cables, see 7.5.1 Ethernet Cables.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
Table 3-32 Interfaces on the EM8T
Interface on theFront Panel
InterfaceType
Usage
FE/GE1-FE/GE8 RJ-45 FE/GE auto-sensing electrical interface, which is usedto access the first and the second channels of Ethernetservice signals.
NOTE
When working in GE mode, the interfaces can work only in auto-adaptation mode; when working in FEmode, the interfaces supports auto-adaptation mode, a straight-through mode, and crossover cable mode.
Table 3-33 lists pins of the interfaces working in FE mode, and Table 3-34 lists the pins of theinterfaces working in GE mode.
Table 3-33 Pins of the interfaces (FE mode)
Front View Pin Description
18 24 3567
1 Positive of twisted pair 1
2 Negative of twisted pair 1
3 Positive of twisted pair 2
4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
6 Negative of twisted pair 2
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Table 3-34 Pins of the interfaces (GE mode)
Front View Pin Description
18 24 3567
1 Positive of twisted pair 1
2 Negative of twisted pair 1
3 Positive of twisted pair 2
4 Positive of twisted pair 3
5 Negative of twisted pair 3
6 Negative of twisted pair 2
7 Positive of twisted pair 4
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
Front View Pin Description
8 Negative of twisted pair 4
3.9.5 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set the parameter for the EM8T.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EM8T.
Ethernet interface
For details on the parameter, see F Board Configuration Parameters.
3.9.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the EM8T include the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.
Table 3-35 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces of the EM8T.
Table 3-35 Specifications of interfaces on the TND1EM8T
Item Specification
Interface rate Supports interface rates at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and1000 Mbit/s.
RJ-45 electrical interfacespecification
Complies with IEEE 802.3.
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W)
Weight (kg): 0.46
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 21.1
3.10 TND1EM4FThis section describes the EM4F, which is an interface board with four FE/GE optical interfaces,in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technicalspecifications.
3.10.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EM4F is TND1.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
3.10.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EM4F mainly accesses 4 x FE/GE optical signals, and processes the services with the CXP.
Table 3-36lists the functions and features of the EM4F.
Table 3-36 Functions and features of the EM4F
Function andFeature
Description
Basic function Supports four FE/GE optical interfaces. Accesses 4 x FE/GE opticalsignals, and processes the services with the CXP.
Supports the hot swappable function.
Detects the temperature and voltage of the board.
DCN Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function is enabled atthe first four ports. In addition, this function can be disabled or enabledmanually.
Interface function Working mode Auto-Negotiation, 100M Full–Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex
Type of the loopback at the port PHY-layer outloopMAC-layer inloop and outloop
Automatic loopback release at theport
Supported
LAG Inter-board LAG Supported
Intra-board LAG Supported
Black list and whitelist of MACaddresses
Supported
Clock Synchronous Ethernet Supported
SSM protocol Supported
IEEE 1588V2 protocol Supported
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe EM4F mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clockmodule, and power supply module.
Figure 3-12shows the block diagram for the functions of the EM4F.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
Figure 3-12 Block diagram for the functions of the EM4F
CXPService access
module
Clock module
Service processing
module
Management module
4 x FE/GE signals Service signalsService signals
Management bus
Management bus
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
System power supplyPower supply
module
Backplane
Clock signalsManagement bus
Clock signals
CXP
CXP
Each module on the boardSystem power
supply
3.3 V
3.0 V
2.5 V
1.2 V
Transmit DirectionThe service packets from CXP are sent to the service processing module through the backplane-side interface of the EM4F. The service processing module identifies the destination interfacesfor the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then, the service processing modulesends the processed packets to the service access module, where coding/decoding, serial/parallelconversion, and E/O conversion are performed. Finally, the service access module outputs thepackets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.
Receive DirectionThe GE/FE interfaces on the front panel receive GE/FE service signals. Then, the service accessmodule performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding on theservices, and then sends the services to the service processing module. The service processingmodule buffers the service packets, schedules the packets based on the service access capabilityof the EM4F and the access bandwidth setting at each interface, and finally outputs the packetsthrough the backplane-side interface.
Service Access ModuleThis module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module receives the GE/FE services from the interfaces on thefront panel, performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding, andthen sends the services to the service processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets from the serviceprocessing module, performs coding/decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and E/Oconversion on the packets, and then outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces onthe front panel.
Service Processing ModuleThis module performs the following functions:
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
l In the receive direction, this module receives and buffers the service packets from theinterface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from different interfacesbased on the access capability of the EM4F and the access bandwidth settings at theseinterfaces. Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives service packets from the CXP, identifies thedestination interfaces of the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets based on theaccess capability of the EM4F and the access bandwidth setting at each interface. Finally,this module outputs the packets to the service access module.
l This module extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock.
l This module extracts and inserts IEEE 1588 V2 packets.
Management Module
This module is used with the CXP to manage and control each module on the EM4F.
Clock Module
This module performs the following functions:
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EM4F.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet and SSM protocols.
l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol.
Power Supply Module
This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EM4F.
l 3.3V
l 3.0V
l 2.5V
l 1.2V
3.10.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the EM4F, there are indicators and interfaces.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 3-13shows the appearance of the front panel of the EM4F.
Figure 3-13 Font panel of the EM4F
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
IndicatorsThe following indicators are present on the front panel of the EM4F.
l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working statusl SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service statusl L/A1 to L/A4 indicators, green or orange, which indicate the port connection status and
data transmit/receive status
For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.
InterfacesFour SFP interfaces are present on the EM4F. Table 3-37 and Table 3-38 list the types andusage of the interfaces.
Table 3-37 Interfaces of the EM4F
Interface on the FrontPanel
InterfaceType
Usage CorrespondingFiber
Opticalinterface
IN1 to IN4 LC When a two-fiber bidirectionaloptical module is used, thisinterface is used as an inputinterface for the GE optical signal.When a single-fiber bidirectionaloptical module is used, thisinterface is not used.
For details,see 7.1Fibers.
OUT1 toOUT4
LC When a two-fiber bidirectionaloptical module is used, thisinterface is used as an outputinterface for the GE/FE opticalsignal.When a single-fiber bidirectionaloptical module is used, thisinterface is used as an input/outputinterface for the GE/FE opticalsignal.
Electricalinterface
OUT1 IN1 toOUT4 IN4
RJ45 Input/Output interfaces for GE/FEelectrical signals
For details,see 7.5.1EthernetCables.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
Interface on the FrontPanel
InterfaceType
Usage CorrespondingFiber
NOTEThe GE SFP interface can function as either an optical interface or an electrical interface.
When the SFP interface functions as an optical interface, it need to be used with an optical module.
l When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, two LC interfaces are provided on the left andright sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receiveservice signals.
l When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, only one LC interface is provided on the leftside of the optical module. This optical interface uses only one fiber, which is used to transmit andreceive service signals at the same time.
When the SFP interface functions as an electrical interface, it need to be used with an electrical module.
Table 3-38 Pins of the GE electrical module
Front View Pin Usage
18 24 3567
1 Positive of twisted pair cable 1
2 Negative of twisted pair cable 1
3 Positive of twisted pair cable 2
4 Positive of twisted pair cable 3
5 Negative of twisted pair cable 3
6 Negative of twisted pair cable 2
7 Positive of twisted pair cable 4
8 Negative of twisted pair cable 4
3.10.5 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set the parameter for the EM4F.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EM4F.
l Ethernet interfacel Automatic Laser Shutdownl Optical Power Management
For details on the parameter, see F Board Configuration Parameters.
3.10.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the EM4F include the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
Table 3-39 lists the specifications of the GE interfaces on the EM4F; Table 3-42 lists thespecifications of the SFP interface with an electrical module.
Table 3-43 lists the specifications of the FE interfaces on the EM4F.
Table 3-39 and Table 3-43 list the specifications of physical the TND1EM4F.
Table 3-39 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface
Item Specification
Opticalinterface type
Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectionalinterface
1000BASE-SX(0.5km)
1000BASE-LX(10km)
1000BASE-VX(40km)
1000BASE-ZX(80 km)
1000BASE-X(100km)
1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)
1000BASE-BX(10 km)
1000BASE-BX(40 km)
1000BASE-BX(80 km)
Fibertype
Multi-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Workingwavelengthrange(nm)
770 to860
1270 to1355
1260 to1360
1500 to1580
1500 to1580
Fordetails,seewavelengthallocation of1000BASE-CWDMopticalinterfaces andrelatedopticalmodulecode.
For details, see wavelengthallocation of 1000BASE-BXoptical interfaces and relatedoptical module code.
Meanlaunchedopticalpower(dBm)
-9.5 to 0 -11 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 5 -9 to -3 -3 to 3 -2 to 4
Receiversensitivity (dBm)
-17 -19 -23 -23 -30 -28 -19.5 -23 -26
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
Item Specification
Opticalinterface type
Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectionalinterface
1000BASE-SX(0.5km)
1000BASE-LX(10km)
1000BASE-VX(40km)
1000BASE-ZX(80 km)
1000BASE-X(100km)
1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)
1000BASE-BX(10 km)
1000BASE-BX(40 km)
1000BASE-BX(80 km)
Minimumoverload(dBm)
0 -3 -3 -3 -10 -9 -3 -3 -3
Minimumextinction ratio(dB)
9 9 9 9 9 8.2 6 9 9
Opticalmodulecode
34060286
34060473
34060298
34060360
34060295
Fordetails,seewavelengthallocation of1000BASE-CWDMopticalinterfaces andrelatedopticalmodulecode.
For details, see wavelengthallocation of 1000BASE-BXoptical interfaces and relatedoptical module code.
NOTEFor details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.
Table 3-40 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module code
SN Optical modulecode
Wavelength (nm) SN Opticalmodule code
Wavelength (nm)
1 34060483 1464.5 to 1477.5 5 34060478 1544.5 to 1557.5
2 34060481 1484.5 to 1497.5 6 34060476 1564.5 to 1577.5
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
SN Optical modulecode
Wavelength (nm) SN Opticalmodule code
Wavelength (nm)
3 34060479 1504.5 to 1517.5 7 34060477 1584.5 to 1597.5
4 34060482 1524.5 to 1537.5 8 34060480 1604.5 to 1617.5
Table 3-41 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code
Item Local Remote Item Local Remote
Optical modulecode
34060470(10 km)
34060475(10 km)
Optical modulecode
34060595(80km)
34060596(80km)
34060539(40 km)
34060540(40 km)
Transmitterwavelength(nm)
1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 Transmitterwavelength(nm)
1560 to 1580 1480 to 1500
Receiverwavelength(nm)
1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360 Receiverwavelength(nm)
1480 to 1500 1560 to 1580
Table 3-42 Interface specifications of the GE electrical module
Item Specification
Interface rate 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s
RJ-45 electrical interfacespecification
Complies with IEEE 802.3.
Table 3-43 Performance specifications of the FE optical interface
Item Specification
Optical interfacetype
Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectional interface
100BASE-FX(15 km)
100BASE-FX(40 km)
100BASE-FX(80 km)
100BASE-BX(10 km)
100BASE-BX(40 km)
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
Item Specification
Workingwavelengthrange (nm)
1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580 For details, seewavelengthallocation of100BASE-BXopticalinterfaces andrelated opticalmodule code.
For details, seewavelengthallocation of100BASE-BXopticalinterfaces andrelated opticalmodule code.
Mean launchedoptical power(dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -15 to -8 -3 to 2
Receiversensitivity(dBm)
-28 -34 -34 -28.2 -24
Minimumoverload (dBm)
-8 -10 -10 -8 -3
Minimumextinction ratio(dB)
8.2 10 10 6.6 8
Optical modulecode
34060276 34060281 34060282 For details, seewavelengthallocation of100BASE-BXopticalinterfaces andrelated opticalmodule code.
For details, seewavelengthallocation of100BASE-BXopticalinterfaces andrelated opticalmodule code.
NOTEFor details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.
Table 3-44 Wavelength allocation of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and related optical module code
Item Local Remote
Optical module code(10 km)
34060363 34060364
Optical module code(40 km)
34060638 34060639
Transmitter wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Receiver wavelength (nm) 1480 to 1580 1260 to 1360
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
Item Local Remote
Note: FE/STM–1 optical modules 34060638 and 34060639 can also support 1000 Mbit/s rate.
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W)
Weight (kg): 0.49
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 12.0
3.11 TND1EM4TThis section describes the EM4T, which is an interface board with four FE/GE electricalinterfaces, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, andtechnical specifications.
3.11.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EM4T is TND1.
3.11.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EM4T mainly accesses 4 x FE/GE electrical signals, and processes the services with theCXP.
Table 3-45lists the functions and features of the EM4T.
Table 3-45 Functions and features of the EM4T
Function andFeature
Description
Basic function Supports four FE/GE einterfaces. Accesses 4 x FE/GE electricalsignals, and processes the services with the CXP.
Supports the hot swappable function.
Detects the temperature and voltage of the board.
DCN Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function is enabled atthe four ports. In addition, this function can be disabled or enabledmanually.
Interface function Working mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M Full–Duplex,100M Full–Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex
Type of the loopback atthe port
PHY-layer outloopMAC-layer inloop and outloop
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
Function andFeature
Description
Automatic loopbackrelease at the port
Supported
LAG Inter-board LAG Supported
Intra-board LAG Supported
Black list and whitelist of MACaddresses
Supported
Clock Synchronous Ethernet Supported
SSM protocol Supported
IEEE 1588V2 protocol Supported
Note: When the interfaces on the front panel work in 10 Mbit/s mode, synchronous Ethernetand IEEE 1588V2 protocol are not applicable.
3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe EM4T mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clockmodule, and power supply module.
Figure 3-14shows the block diagram for the functions of the EM4T.
Figure 3-14 Block diagram for the functions of the EM4T
CXPService access
module
Clock module
Service processing
module
Management module
4 x FE/GE signals Service signalsService signals
Management bus
Management bus
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
System power supplyPower supply
module
Backplane
Clock signalsManagement bus
Clock signals
CXP
CXP
Each module on the boardSystem power
supply
3.3 V
3.0 V
2.5 V
1.2 V
Transmit DirectionThe service packets from CXP are sent to the service processing module through the backplane-side interface of the EM4T. The service processing module identifies the destination interfaces
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
for the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then, the service processing modulesends the processed packets to the service access module, where coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion are performed. Finally, the service access module outputs the packets throughthe GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.
Receive Direction
The GE/FE interfaces on the front panel receive GE/FE service signals. Then, the service accessmodule performs serial/parallel conversion and coding/decoding on the services, and then sendsthe services to the service processing module. The service processing module buffers the servicepackets, schedules the packets based on the service access capability of the EM4T and the accessbandwidth setting at each interface, and finally outputs the packets through the backplane-sideinterface.
Service Access Module
This module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module receives the GE/FE services from the interfaces on thefront panel, performs serial/parallel conversion and coding/decoding, and then sends theservices to the service processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets from the serviceprocessing module, performs coding/decoding, and serial/parallel conversion on thepackets, and then outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.
Service Processing Module
This module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module receives and buffers the service packets from theinterface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from different interfacesbased on the access capability of the EM4T and the access bandwidth settings at theseinterfaces. Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives service packets from the CXP, identifies thedestination interfaces of the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets based on theaccess capability of the EM4T and the access bandwidth setting at each interface. Finally,this module outputs the packets to the service access module.
l This module extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock.
l This module extracts and inserts IEEE 1588 V2 packets.
Management Module
This module is used with the CXP to manage and control each module on the EM4T.
Clock Module
This module performs the following functions:
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EM4T.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet and SSM protocols.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol.
Power Supply Module
This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EM4T.
l 3.3V
l 3.0V
l 2.5V
l 1.2V
3.11.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the EM4T, there are indicators and interfaces.
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 3-15shows the appearance of the front panel of the EM4T.
Figure 3-15 Font panel of the EM4T
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EM4T.
l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
l SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
NOTE
Above each service interface, there is a service port connection status indicator (LINK) and a service porttransmit/receive status indicator (ACT).
For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.
Interfaces
On the EM4T, 4 interfaces are present. Table 3-46 lists the quantity, types, and usage of theinterfaces. The interfaces support auto-adaptation in the case of straight-through cables orcrossover cables. For corresponding cables, see 7.5.1 Ethernet Cables.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
Table 3-46 Interfaces on the EM4T
Interface on theFront Panel
InterfaceType
Usage
FE/GE1-FE/GE4 RJ-45 FE/GE auto-sensing electrical interface, which is usedto access the first and the second channels of Ethernetservice signals.
NOTE
When working in GE mode, the interfaces can work only in auto-adaptation mode; when working in FEmode, the interfaces supports auto-adaptation mode, a straight-through mode, and crossover cable mode.
Table 3-47 lists pins of the FE electrical interfaces on the EM4T, and Table 3-48 lists the pinsof the GE electrical interfaces on the EM4T.
Table 3-47 Pins of the FE electrical interfaces on the EM4T
Front View Pin Description
18 24 3567
1 Positive of twisted pair 1
2 Negative of twisted pair 1
3 Positive of twisted pair 2
4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
6 Negative of twisted pair 2
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Table 3-48 Pins of the GE electrical interfaces on the EM4T
Front View Pin Description
18 24 3567
1 Positive of twisted pair 1
2 Negative of twisted pair 1
3 Positive of twisted pair 2
4 Positive of twisted pair 3
5 Negative of twisted pair 3
6 Negative of twisted pair 2
7 Positive of twisted pair 4
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
Front View Pin Description
8 Negative of twisted pair 4
3.11.5 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set the parameter for the EM4T.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EM4T.
Ethernet interface
For details on the parameter, see F Board Configuration Parameters.
3.11.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the EM4T include the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.
Table 3-49 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces of the EM4T.
Table 3-49 Specifications of interfaces on the TND1EM4T
Item Specification
Interface rate Supports interface rates at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and1000 Mbit/s.
RJ-45 electrical interfacespecification
Complies with IEEE 802.3.
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W)
Weight (kg): 0.44
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 10.4
3.12 TND2AQ1This section describes the TND2AQ1, a 4 x STM-1 ATM service interface board, in terms ofthe version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
3.12.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the AQ1 board is TND2.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
3.12.2 Functions and FeaturesWhen working with the CXP board, the AQ1 board receives and processes 4 x STM-1 ATMservices.
Table 3-50 lists the functions and features of the AQ1 board.
Table 3-50 Functions and features of the AQ1 board
Function andFeature
Description
Basic function Service interfaces on thefront panel
Provides four STM-1 ATM opticalinterfaces.
Detects and queries temperature and voltage, and supports hotplugging.
Interfacing function Laser functions Supports automatic shutdown oflasers.Queries laser information.Detects and reports laser-relatedalarms.Detects and reports laser-relatedperformance events.
Port loopback type InloopOutloopNo loopback
Automatic loopback release Supported
ATM Supported traffic types CBRUBRUBR+rt-VBRnrt-VBR
Priority for schedulingATM connections
CBR > rtVBR > nrtVBR > UBR+ >UBR
Number of supported PWs Remote services: 256
Local services: 128
Number of supported ATMVP/VC switchingconnections
1000
Waiting time duringencapsulation of ATM PWpackets
Value range: 1000 us to 50000 us.Step: 1000 us. Default value: 1000 us.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
Function andFeature
Description
Supports the encapsulation from ATM VPC/VCC to PWE3 in the N-to-1 (N≤32) and 1-to-1 formats.
Supports the PW encapsulation for the ATM cells in the concatenationand non-concatenation formats. The number of PW connections thatsupport cell concatenation is 1024 and the maximum number ofconcatenated cells is 31.
ATM OAM on the UNI sideand NNI side
Supports the CC test.
Supports the LB test.
Supports the AIS.
Supports the RDI.
Linear multiplexsection protection(LMSP)
l Supports intra-board and inter-board 1+1/1:1 LMSP.l The protection switching time is less than 50 ms.
Insertion andextraction of S1bytes
Supported
3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe AQ1 board consists of an ATM access module, an ATM processing module, a dataprocessing module, a management module, a clock module, and a power supply module.
Figure 3-16 shows the functional block diagram of the AQ1 board.
Figure 3-16 Functional block diagram of the AQ1 board
Clock module
Power supply module
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Service signals
PIU
PIU
CXP
CXP A
System clock signals
3.3 V ...
1.1 V
Backplane
CXP BService signals
ATM processing module
ATM access module
Data processing module
Management module
Management bus
Management bus
4 x STM-1 ATM signals ATM cells ATM cells
Management bus Management bus
CXP
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
Upstream Direction
In the upstream direction, the AQ1 board receives STM-1 ATM service signals throughinterfaces on the front panel and sends the signals into its ATM access module. When receivingATM signals, the ATM access module extracts ATM cells from the signals and sends the ATMcells to the ATM processing module, which performs VP/VC switching for the ATM cells,OAM, and QoS functions such as traffic management, and sends the ATM cells to the dataprocessing module. The data processing module performs PW encapsulation on the ATM cellsand sends the ATM cells to the CXP board through the backplane-side interfaces.
Downstream Direction
In the downstream direction, the data processing module receives service signals through thebackplane-side interfaces, performs PW decapsulation into ATM cells, and sends the ATM cellsto the ATM processing module. The ATM processing module performs ATM OAM and QoSfunctions such as traffic management, and sends the ATM cells to the ATM access module. TheATM access module maps the ATM cells into SDH signals and sends the SDH signals throughthe interfaces on the front panel.
ATM Access Module
This module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module receives 4 x STM1 ATM signals at a rate of 155 Mbit/s, processes SDH overheads, pointers, and alarms, extracts ATM cells from the SDHsignals, extracts the line clock from the ATM cells, and sends the ATM cells to the ATMprocessing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module maps the ATM cells that are transmitted from theATM processing module into SDH signals, processes SDH overheads, pointers, and alarms,and forms SDH frames.
ATM Processing Module
This module performs VP/VC switching for ATM cells, OAM, and QoS functions such trafficmanagement, traffic shaping, and queue scheduling.
l In the receive direction, this module determines the traffic priority of ATM cells. Ifcongestion occurs, this module determines whether to discard ATM cells or to continuetransmitting ATM cells according to the traffic priority. If ATM cells need to be furthertransmitted, this module performs VP/VC switching on ATM cells and sends the ATMcells to the data processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module processes packet headers of ATM cells and performsVP/VC switching on ATM cells. If congestion occurs, this module determines whether todiscard ATM cells or to continue transmitting ATM cells. If ATM cells need to be furthertransmitted, this module sends ATM cells to the ATM access module.
l Supports back pressure and implements traffic management.
l Supports F4 OAM and F5 OAM.
– Supports the connection confirm (CC) test.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
– Supports the loopback (LB) test.
Data Processing ModuleThis module performs PW encapsulation and decapsulation on packets:
l In the receive direction, this module receives ATM cells, performs PW encapsulation onthe cells in the concatenation or non-concatenation format, and sends the cells to theprocessing board through the backplane-side interfaces.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives PWE3 packets from the backplane-sideinterfaces, determines the service types of the packets, performs PW decapsulation on thepackets to obtain ATM cells, and sends the ATM cells to the ATM processing module.
Management ModuleThis module performs the following functions:
l Manages and controls other modules on the board.l Processes clock signals with the clock module.
Clock ModuleThis module provides the working clock for other modules on the board.
Power Supply ModuleThis module provides required voltages for other modules on the board.l 3.3 Vl 2.5 Vl 1.8 Vl 1.2 Vl 1.1 V
3.12.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the AQ1 board, there are indicators and four interfaces.
Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 3-17 shows the front panel of the AQ1 board.
Figure 3-17 Front panel of the AQ1 board
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AQ1 board:
l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
l SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
l LOS1 to LOS4 indicators, red or green, which indicate the port status
For details on indications of indicators, see B Indicators.
Interfaces
Four SFP interfaces are present on the front panel of the AQ1 board. Table 3-51 lists the typesand usage of the interfaces. For details on fiber connections to these interfaces, see 7.1.1 FiberTypes.
Table 3-51 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AQ1 board
Interface on the FrontPanel
Interface Type Usage
IN1 to IN4 LC Input interface for STM-1optical signals
OUT1 to OUT4 LC Output interface for STM-1optical signals
NOTEThe SFP interface should be used with an optical module.
3.12.5 Board Configuration ReferenceThe AQ1 board can be configured using the U2000.
On the U2000, users can set the following parameters for the AQ1 board:
l J0
l J1
l C2
l Automatic laser shutdown
l SDH interface
For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.
3.12.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the AQ1 board cover interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
Interface SpecificationsTable 3-52 lists the technical specifications for the interfaces on the AQ1 board.
Table 3-52 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface
Item Specification
Nominalbit rate(kbit/s)
155520
Opticalinterfacetype
Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiberbidirectional interface
I-1(2km)
S-1.1(15 km)
L-1.1(40 km)
L-1.2(80 km)
S-1.1(15 km)
L-1.1(40 km)
Fiber type Multi-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Workingwavelength range(nm)
1270 to1380
1261 to1360
1263 to1360
1480 to1580
Fordetails, seewavelengthallocationof single-fiberbidirectional opticalinterfaceand relatedopticalmodulecode.
Fordetails, seewavelengthallocationof single-fiberbidirectional opticalinterfaceand relatedopticalmodulecode.
Meanlaunchedopticalpower(dBm)
–20 to –14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -15 to -8 -3 to 2
Receiversensitivity(dBm)
–30 -28 -34 -34 -28.2 -24
Minimumoverload(dBm)
–14 -8 -10 -10 -8 -3
Minimumextinctionratio (dB)
10 8.2 10 10 6.6 8
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
Item Specification
Opticalmodulecode
34060287 34060276 34060281 34060282 Fordetails, seewavelengthallocationof single-fiberbidirectional opticalinterfaceand relatedopticalmodulecode.
Fordetails, seewavelengthallocationof single-fiberbidirectional opticalinterfaceand relatedopticalmodulecode.
NOTEFor details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.
The optical module with the BOM number of 34060287 supports the query of only manufacturerinformation, but not the power, bias current, temperature performance, or alarm information.
Table 3-53 Wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional interface optical interface and related optical modulecode
Item Local Remote
Optical module code(15 km)
34060363 34060364
Optical module code(40 km)
34060638 34060639
Transmitter wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Receiver wavelength (nm) 1480 to 1580 1260 to 1360
Other SpecificationsBoard dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 193.80 (W) x 225.75 (D)
Weight (kg): 0.58kg
Power consumption (W): 23.00W
3.13 TND1SQ1This section describes the TND1SQ1, 4 channels STM-1 service interface board, in terms of theversion, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
3.13.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SQ1 board is TND1.
3.13.2 Functions and FeaturesWhen working with the CXP board, the SQ1 board receives and processes 4 channels STM-1(VC3/VC4) signals.
Table 3-54 lists the functions and features of the SQ1.
Table 3-54 Functions and features of the SQ1 board
Function andFeature
Description
Basic function Service interfaces on thefront panel
Provides four STM-1(VC3/VC4)optical interfaces.
Detects and queries temperature and voltage, and supports hotplugging.Supports the SDH/SONET mode configuration.
Interfacing function Laser functions Supports automatic shutdown oflasers.Queries laser information.Detects and reports laser-relatedalarms.Detects and reports laser-relatedperformance events.
Port loopback type InloopOutloopNo loopback (Default type)
Automatic loopback release SupportedLoopback can be automaticallyreleased at specified time.
CES Simulation service types VC4STS-3CVC3STS-1
Maximum service count Local services: 2
Remote services: 4
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
Function andFeature
Description
Transparent transmission ofSDH/SONET sectionoverheads
Supported
Transparent transmission ofhigher order POH
Supported
Remote loopback andPRBS test
Supported
Detects a power-off noticeof a remote device andReports alarm.
Supported
Supports setting of jitter buffer time for CES services. Users can setthe jitter buffer time within the range of 0.125 ms to 16 ms at a steplength of 0.125 ms (it is 1 ms by default).
Linear multiplexsection protection(LMSP)
l Supports intra-board and inter-board 1+1/1:1 LMSP.l The protection switching time is less than 50 ms.
Insertion andextraction of S1bytes
Supported
3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe SQ1 board consists of an SDH processing module, a logic processing module, a dataprocessing module, a management module, a clock module, and a power supply module.
Figure 3-18 shows the functional block diagram of the SQ1 board.
Figure 3-18 Functional block diagram of the SQ1 board
Clock module
Power supply module
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Service signals
PIU
PIU
CXP
CXP A
System clock signals
3.3 V ...
1.0 V
Backplane
CXP BService signals
Logic processing module
SDH processing
module
Data processing module
Management module
Management bus
Management bus
4 xSTM-1(VC3/VC4)signals Service signalService signal
Management bus Management bus
CXP
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
Upstream Direction
In the upstream direction, the SQ1 board receives 4 channels STM-1(VC3/VC4) signals throughinterfaces on the front panel and sends the signals into its SDH processing module. Whenreceiving the SDH signals, the SDH processing module recovers the clock data, aligns frames,processes section overheads, interprets the higher order pointers, regenerates pointers, andprocesses higher order overheads. Then the SDH processing module sends the signals to thehigher order cross-connect module, which processes and sends the signals to the logic processingmodule. The logic processing module determines the service signal type based on CPUconfigurations. For VC-4 or STS-3C signals, the logic processing module transparently transmitsthem to the data processing module over the bus. For VC-3 or STS-1 signals, the logic processingmodule demaps the signals in the bus, processes and regenerates pointers, processes higher orderoverheads , then maps the signals into VC4,converts AU3 signals to TUG3 signals. Afterwards,the logic processing module sends the signals to the data processing module over the bus. Thedata processing module encapsulates the signals in PWE3, schedules PWs, and sends the signalsto CXP through the backplane-side interfaces.
Downstream Direction
In the downstream direction, the board performs the reverse process.
The data processing module receives service signals from CXP, determines the service signaltype, decapsulates signals from PWE3, and sends the signals to the logic processing module.The logic processing module processes different types of signals in different ways. For VC-4 orSTS-3S signals, the logic processing module converts TUG3 signals to AU3 signals, and sendsthe signals to the SDH processing module. For VC-3 signals, the logic processing moduledirectly transparently transits them to the SDH processing module. When receiving the signals,the SDH processing module frames VC-3 or VC-4 signals, adds overheads and pointers,processes alarms, and finally sends STM-1(VC3/VC4) signals to other boards through theinterfaces on the front panel.
SDH Processing Module
This module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module recovers clock or data from the received 4 channelsSTM-1(VC3/VC4) signals, align frames, descrambles signals, processes SOHs, adjustspointers, processes POHs. Then it sends the signals to the logic processing module over abus for further processing.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives service signals from the logic processingmodule, reframes VC-3 or VC-4 signals, adds overheads and pointers, processes alarms,and sends 4 channels STM-1(VC3/VC4) signals to other boards through the interfaces onthe front panel.
l This module performs LMSP protection switching to protect services against failures.
l This module extracts and recovers the line clock.
logic Processing Module
This module performs the following functions:
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
l In the receive direction, this module receives service signals from the SDH processingmodule, and determines the service signal type based on CPU configurations. For VC-4 orSTS-3C signals, this module transparently transmits them to the data processing moduleover the bus. For VC-3 or STS-1 signals, it demaps the signals in the bus, processes andregenerates pointers, and maps the signals into VC-4s. Finally, this module sends the signalsto the service processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives signals from the data processing module,processes the signals, and sends the signals to the SDH processing module.
Data Processing ModuleThis module performs the following functions.
l In the receive direction, this module obtains PW information about the service, encapsulatessignals in PWE3, schedules PWs, and sends the signals to CXP through the backplane-sideinterfaces.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives service signals from CXP, determines theservice signal type, decapsulates PWE3 signals, and schedules the signals.
Management ModuleThis module works with CXP to manage and control other modules on the board.
Clock ModuleThis module performs the following functions:
l Recovers the line clock.l Receives the system clock from CXP and provides the working clock for each module on
the board.l Supports the synchronization status message (SSM) protocol.
Power Supply ModuleThis module provides required voltages for other modules on the board.
l 3.3 Vl 3.0 Vl 2.5 Vl 1.5 Vl 1.2 Vl 1.0 V
3.13.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the SQ1 board, there are indicators and interfaces.
Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 3-19 shows the front panel of the SQ1 board.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
Figure 3-19 Front panel of the SQ1 board
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the SQ1 board:
l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
l SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
l LOS1 to LOS4 indicators, red or green, which indicate the port status
For details on meanings of the indicators, see B Indicators.
Interfaces
Four SFP interfaces are present on the front panel of the SQ1 board. Table 3-55 lists the typesand usage of the interfaces. For details on fiber connections to these interfaces, see 7.1.1 FiberTypes.
Table 3-55 Types and usage of the interfaces on the SQ1 board
Interface on the FrontPanel
Interface Type Usage
IN1 to IN4 LC Input interface for STM-1(VC3/VC4) optical signals
OUT1 to OUT4 LC Output interface for STM-1(VC3/VC4) optical signals
NOTEThe SFP interface should be used with an optical module.
3.13.5 Board Configuration ReferenceThe SQ1 board can be configured using the U2000.
On the U2000, users can set the following parameters for the SQ1 board:
l J0
l J1
l C2
l Automatic laser shutdown
l SDH interface
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
l Working mode
l Pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) test
NOTE
In transparent transmission mode, the "J1 to be Sent([Mode]Content)" of "Trace Byte J1" and the "SignalFlag C2" do not apply and no alarm is reported.
For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.
3.13.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the SQ1 board cover interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.
Interface Specifications
Table 3-56 lists the technical specifications for the STM-1 optical interfaces on the SQ1 board.
Table 3-56 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface
Item Specification
Nominal bitrate (kbit/s)
155520
Opticalinterfacetype
Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectionalinterface
S-1.1(15 km)
L-1.1(40 km)
L-1.2(80 km)
S-1.1(15 km)
L-1.1(40 km)
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Workingwavelengthrange (nm)
1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580 For details,seewavelengthallocation ofsingle-fiberbidirectionalopticalinterface andrelatedopticalmodulecode.
For details,seewavelengthallocation ofsingle-fiberbidirectionalopticalinterface andrelatedopticalmodulecode.
Meanlaunchedopticalpower (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -15 to -8 -3 to 2
Receiversensitivity(dBm)
-28 -34 -34 -28.2 -24
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
Item Specification
Minimumoverload(dBm)
-8 -10 -10 -8 -3
Minimumextinctionratio (dB)
8.2 10 10 6.6 8
Opticalmodule code
34060276 34060281 34060282 For details,seewavelengthallocation ofsingle-fiberbidirectionalopticalinterface andrelatedopticalmodulecode.
For details,seewavelengthallocation ofsingle-fiberbidirectionalopticalinterface andrelatedopticalmodulecode.
NOTEFor details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.
Table 3-57 Wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional interface optical interface and related optical modulecode
Item Local Remote
Optical module code(15 km)
34060363 34060364
Optical module code(40 km)
34060638 34060639
Transmitter wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Receiver wavelength (nm) 1480 to 1580 1260 to 1360
Other SpecificationsBoard dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 193.80 (W) x 225.75 (D)
Weight (kg): 0.53kg
Power consumption (W): 11.50W
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
3.14 TND1CQ1BThis section describes the TND1CQ1B, which is a 4 x STM-1 optical interface board, in termsof the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
3.14.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CQ1B is TND2.
3.14.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CQ1B, which is used with the CXP, accesses and processes 4 x channelized STM-1 services,and supports the intra-board LMSP protection. The CQ1B supports the CES protocols.
Table 3-58 lists functions and features of the CQ1B.
Table 3-58 Functions and features of the CQ1B
Function andFeature
Remarks
Basic function Service interfaces on thefront panel
Supports four channelized STM-1optical interfaces.
DCN All the VC-12 timeslots of each interface support the DCN function.By default, the DCN function of only the first, seventeenth, thirty-third, and forty-ninth VC-12 timeslots of each optical interface can beenabled.Manually enables or disables the DCN function of the VC-12timeslots of the optical interface on the board.
PRBS Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of a VC12timeslot in the receive/transmit direction.
Interface function Automatic shutdownfunction of the laser at theport
Supported
Type of the loopback at theport
Inloop at an STM-1 portOutloop at an STM-1 portInloop in a VC-12 channelOutloop in a VC-12 channel
Automatic loopback releaseat the port
Supported
ATM/IMA Number of supported ATME1 services
128
Number of supported IMAgroups
32
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
Function andFeature
Remarks
Maximum number ofVC-12 timeslots or serialports in each IMA group
32
Dynamically enables or disables the IMA group, restarts the IMAgroup protocol, and dynamically adds or deletes the IMA groupmembers.
Supported traffic type CBRUBRUBR+rt-VBRnrt-VBR
Number of supported ATMconnections(VPC and VCC included)
1024 remote connections512 local connections
Number of supported ATMservices
256
Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-to-1 (N≤32) or 1-to-1 format.
Encapsulates the ATM cells to the PW in the concatenation and non-concatenation modes. The number of PW connections that support thecell concatenation is 64, and the maximum number of concatenatedcells is 31.
ATM OAM on the UNI sideand NNI side
Supports the CC test
Supports the LB test.
CES Number of supported CESservices
252
Supported emulation mode CESoPSNSAToP
Supports the timeslot compression function. Provides the idle 64 kbit/s timeslot suppression function for the CES services in the CESoPSNmode to save the transmission bandwidth.
Supported clock mode Retiming mode
The jitter compensation buffer time of the CES service can be set. Thejitter buffer time ranges from 0.375 ms to 16 ms, and the step valueis 0.125 ms.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
Function andFeature
Remarks
The packet loading time of the CES service can be set. Theencapsulation buffer time ranges from 0.25 ms to 3 ms, and the stepvalue is 0.125 ms.
ML-PPP Number of supported ML-PPP groups
64
Maximum number of linkssupported by each ML-PPPgroup
16
Functions as the NNI interface, and functions as the UNI interface toaccess IP packets of the L3VPN services.
LMSP protection Supports the 1+1 LMSP and 1:1 LMSP protection schemes.
Extraction andinsertion of the S1byte
Supported
SSM protocol Supported
3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe CQ1B consists of the SDH processing module, line processing module, data processingmodule, management module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 3-20 shows the block diagram for working principle of the CQ1B.
Figure 3-20 Block diagram for the working principle of the CQ1B
SDH processing
module
Line processing
module
Data processing
module
Management module
Clock module
Power supply module
Backplane
Service signal
Service signal
Service signal
CXP
CXP
-48V/-60V System power supply
-48V/-60V
Management bus
Management busManagement busManagement bus
3.3V
1.0V
.
.
.
.
.
.
4 x STM-1
Line clocksLine clocks
System clocksCXP
CXP
System power supply
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
Receive Direction
In the receive direction, the SDH processing module accesses 4 x channelized STM-1 servicesthrough the interface on the front panel. This module decapsulates the VC-12 timeslots from theSTM-1 signals, recovers the E1 signals, processes the overhead bytes, pointers, and alarmsignals, and sends the processed signals to the line processing module. Then, the line processingmodule rearranges the E1 frames, processes the rearranged signals, and sends the signals to thedata processing module for PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling. Finally, the signals aresent to the CXP through the interface on the backplane.
Transmit Direction
In the transmit direction, the data processing module receives the signals from the CXP, identifiesthe signals, performs the PWE3 decapsulation, and then sends the signals to the line processingmodule. The line processing module processes various signals, schedules queues, and sends theprocessed signals to the SDH processing module. The SDH processing module maps the E1signals to the VC-12 timeslots, multiplexes the VC-12 timeslots to the STM-1 signals, adds theoverhead bytes and pointers, processes the alarm signals, and sends out the STM-1 signalsthrough the interface on the front panel.
SDH Processing Module
This module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module accesses 4 x channelized STM-1 signals, decapsulatesthe VC-12 timeslots from the STM-1 signals, obtains the E1 signals by demapping theVC-12 timeslots, and processes the overhead bytes, pointers, and alarm signals.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the E1 signals from the line processingmodule, maps the signals to the VC-12 timeslots, multiplexes the VC-12 timeslots toSTM-1 signals, adds the overhead bytes and pointers, processes the alarm signals, and sendsout the 4 x channelized STM-1 signals through the interface on the backplane.
l When the service fails, this module realizes the LMSP protection. Thus, the service isswitched.
l This module extracts and recovers the line clocks.
Line Processing Module
This module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module receives the signals from the SDH processing module,rearranges the frames of the E1 signals, performs processing for various services such assetup and deletion of the IMA link, creation of the ML-PPP group, extraction of protocolpackets in the ML-PPP services, and suppression of timeslots of the CES services. Then,the processed signals are sent to the data processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the signals from the data processing module,and sends the processed signals to the SDH processing module.
Data Processing Module
This module performs the following functions:
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
l In the receive direction, this module obtains the corresponding PW channel information ofeach E1 service, performs the PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and sends theprocessed signals to the CXP through the interface on the backplane.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the signals from the CXP, and performs thePWE3 decapsulation and service scheduling.
l In the case of the ATM E1 or IMA services, this module performs the VP/VC switchingfor the ATM cells, and processes the concatenated cells during the PWE3 encapsulation ordecapsulation.
Management ModuleWhen used with the CXP, this module manages and controls each module on the CQ1B.
Clock ModuleThis module performs the following functions:
l Processes the line clocks.l Accesses and processes the system clock from the CXP, and provides the working clock
to each module on the CQ1B.l Supports the SSM protocol.
Power Supply ModuleThis module performs the following functions:
l Accesses two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies.l Supplies the working power for each module on the CQ1B.
3.14.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the CQ1B, there are indicators and interfaces.
Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 3-21 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CQ1B.
Figure 3-21 Appearance of the front panel of the CQ1B
IndicatorsThe following indicators are present on the front panel of the CQ1B:
l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
l SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
l LOS1 and LOS4 indicators, red, green, which indicate the port status
For details on indications of indicators, see B Indicators.
Interfaces
Table 3-59 lists the amount, types, and usage of the interfaces on the CQ1B.
Table 3-59 Interfaces on the CQ1B
Interface onthe FrontPanel
InterfaceType
Usage CorrespondingFiber
IN1 to IN4 LC This interface is used as an inputinterface for the STM-1 optical signal.
For details, see7.1.1 Fiber Types.
OUT1 toOUT4
LC This interface is used as an outputinterface for the STM-1 optical signal.
NOTEThe SFP interface should be used with an optical module.
3.14.5 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the CQ1B.
You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the CQ1B.
l J0
l J1
l J2
l C2
l V5
l SDH interface
l Automatic laser shutdown
l Spare timeslot recovery value
For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.
3.14.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the CQ1B cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.
For the technical specifications of the CQ1B, see Table 3-60.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
Table 3-60 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface
Item Specification
Nominal bitrate (kbit/s)
155520
Opticalinterfacetype
Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectionalinterface
S-1.1(15 km)
L-1.1(40 km)
L-1.2(80 km)
S-1.1(15 km)
L-1.1(40 km)
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Workingwavelengthrange (nm)
1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580 For details,seewavelengthallocation ofsingle-fiberbidirectionalopticalinterface andrelatedopticalmodulecode.
For details,seewavelengthallocation ofsingle-fiberbidirectionalopticalinterface andrelatedopticalmodulecode.
Meanlaunchedopticalpower (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -15 to -8 -3 to 2
Receiversensitivity(dBm)
-28 -34 -34 -28.2 -24
Minimumoverload(dBm)
-8 -10 -10 -8 -3
Minimumextinctionratio (dB)
8.2 10 10 6.6 8
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
Item Specification
Opticalmodule code
34060276 34060281 34060282 For details,seewavelengthallocation ofsingle-fiberbidirectionalopticalinterface andrelatedopticalmodulecode.
For details,seewavelengthallocation ofsingle-fiberbidirectionalopticalinterface andrelatedopticalmodulecode.
NOTEFor details of the optical module, see 5.2 Optical Module Labels.
Table 3-61 Wavelength allocation of single-fiber bidirectional interface optical interface and related optical modulecode
Item Local Remote
Optical module code(15 km)
34060363 34060364
Optical module code(40 km)
34060638 34060639
Transmitter wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Receiver wavelength (nm) 1480 to 1580 1260 to 1360
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W)
Weight (kg): 0.53
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 10.5
3.15 TND3ML1A/TND3ML1BThis section describes the ML1A/ML1B, a 16-channel E1 electrical interface board, in terms ofthe version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
NOTE
The mapping impedance of an interface on the ML1A is 75 ohm, and the mapping impedance of an interfaceon the ML1B is 120 ohm. Except the difference of mapping impedance, the functions and features of theML1A and ML1B are the same.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
3.15.1 Version DescriptionThe function version of the ML1A/ML1B is TND3.
3.15.2 Functions and FeaturesThe ML1A/ML1B is an E1 interface board. The ML1A/ML1B must be used with the systemcontrol board to access and process 16 channels of E1 services. Services at interfaces on theML1A/ML1B can be flexibly configured, and protocols such as ATM E1, IMA, CES, and ML-PPP are supported.
Table 3-62 lists the functions and features of the ML1A/ML1B.
Table 3-62 Functions and features of the ML1A/ML1B
Function and Feature Remarks
Basic functions Accesses and processes 16 x E1 signals and supports the ATM E1,IMA, CES, and ML-PPP protocols.
DCN Supports the in-band DCN. By default, the DCN function isenabled at the first and the sixteenth E1 ports. In addition, thisfunction can be disabled or enabled manually.
Interface functions Supports collection of bandwidth utilization statistics at an IMA/ML-PPP port.
Fractional E1 Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kbit/s level.
PRBS Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of an E1port in the receive/transmit direction.
ATM/IMA Number of supported IMAgroups/supported ATM E1 services
16
Maximum number of E1 linksor 64 kbit/s level serial ports ineach IMA group
16
Dynamically enables or disables the IMA group, restarts the IMAgroup protocol, and dynamically adds or deletes the IMA groupmembers.
Supported traffic types CBRUBRUBR+rt-VBRnrt-VBR
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
Function and Feature Remarks
Number of supported ATMconnections(VPC and VCC included)
256 remote connections128 local connections
Number of supported ATMservices
64
Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-to-1(N≤32) or 1-to-1 format.
Encapsulates the ATM cells to the PW in the concatenation andnon-concatenation modes. The number of PW connections thatsupport the cell concatenation is 64, and the maximum number ofconcatenated cells is 31.
ATM OAM on the UNI side andNNI side
Supports the CC test.
Supports the LB test.
CES Number of supported CESservices
16
Supported emulation mode CESoPSNSAToP
Supports the timeslot compression function. Provides the idle 64kbit/s timeslot suppression function for the CES services in theCESoPSN mode to save the transmission bandwidth.
Supported clock modes Retiming mode
The jitter compensation buffer time of the CES service can be set.The jitter buffer time ranges from 0.375 ms to 16 ms, and the stepvalue is 0.125 ms.
The packet loading time of the CES service can be set. Theencapsulation buffer time ranges from ms to 3 ms, and the stepvalue is 0.125 ms.
ML-PPP Number of supported ML-PPPgroups
7
Maximum number of linkssupported by each ML-PPPgroup
16
Functions as the NNI interface, and functions as the UNI interfaceto access IP packets of the L3VPN services.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
3.15.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe ML1A/ML1B mainly consists of the service access module, service processing module,management module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 3-22 shows the functional block diagram of the ML1A/ML1B.
Figure 3-22 Functional block diagram of the ML1A/ML1B
Clock module
Power supply module
Service access module
Management module
16 x E1 Service signal Service processing
module
Service signal
Backplane
3.3V
1V
.
.
.
.
.
.
-48V/-60V
-48V/-60V
Line clocks
Line clocksSystem clocks
Management bus
Management bus
CXP
CXP
CXPCXP
System power supply
System power supply
Transmit Direction
The service signals from the system control board are sent to the service processing module.The service processing module performs PWE3 decapsulation and PW scheduling for the servicesignals, processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols,performs the E1 framing function, and sends the service signals to the service access module.The service access module performs encoding and line drive for the signals and outputs thesignals through the backplane-side interfaces.
Receive Direction
The board accesses service signals through the backplane-side interfaces, and then the signalsare sent to the service access module. The service access module performs interference isolation,lightning-proof, impedance matching, level conversion, signal balancing, decoding, and thensends the processed signals to the service processing module. The service processing moduleperforms E1 framing, processes service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPPprotocols, implements PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and sends the signals to thesystem control board through the backplane-side interfaces.
Service Access Module
This module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module isolates common mode interference, protects circuitsagainst transient failures, matches the impedance in the receive direction with the internal
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
impedance, and performs level conversion, balancing, and decoding for the service signals.Finally, this module sends the processed signals to the service processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signals from the serviceprocessing module, encodes the signals, drives the line, and outputs the service signalsthrough the backplane-side interfaces.
l This module recovers the line clock.
Service Processing Module
This module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module receives the signals from the service access moduleand performs E1 framing. This module also identifies protocol types of the service signals,processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols (forexample, addition and deletion of IMA group members, VP/VC switching andconcatenation of ATM cells, vacant slot compression of CES services, and setup of ML-PPP groups). Then, this module performs PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, Finally,this module converts the processed signals to high-rate signals, and then sends the signalsto the system control board through the backplane-side interfaces.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the high-rate signals from the system controlboard through the backplane-side interfaces and recovers low-rate service signals. Then,this module performs PWE3 decapsulation, identifies different protocols and processes theservice signals, and completes E1 framing. Finally, this module sends the processed signalsto the service access module.
Management Module
This module manages and controls each module on the board.
Clock Module
This module performs the following functions:
l When used with the system control board, processes the recovered line clock.
l Provides the working clock for each module on the board.
Power Supply Module
This module converts the input DC voltage into various DC voltages required by each moduleon the board.
3.15.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the ML1A/ML1B, there are indicators and interfaces.
Appearances of the Front Panel
Figure 3-23 shows the appearances of the front panel of the ML1A and ML1B.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
Figure 3-23 Front panels of the ML1A and the ML1B
IndicatorsThe following indicators are present on the front panel of the ML1A/ML1B:
l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working statusl SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.
InterfacesThere is one Anea 96 interface on the front panel of the ML1A/ML1B. Table 3-63 lists the typeand usage of the interfaces. 7.5.2 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables and 7.5.3 120-Ohm 16 x E1Cables list the cables corresponding to the interfaces.
Table 3-63 Type and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the ML1A/ML1B
Interfaceon theFrontPanel
InterfaceType
Usage
ML1A ML1B
1 to 16 Anea 96 75-ohm interface, which is usedto transmit or receive the first tosixteenth channels of E1services.
120-ohm interface, which isused to transmit or receive thefirst to sixteenth channels of E1services.
Table 3-64 lists the pins of the Anea 96 interface.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
Table 3-64 Pins of the Anea 96 interface
Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage
1 R x 1 25 T x 1
2 26
3 R x 2 27 T x 2
4 28
5 R x 3 29 T x 3
6 30
7 R x 4 31 T x 4
8 32
9 R x 5 33 T x 5
10 34
11 R x 6 35 T x 6
12 36
13 R x 7 37 T x 7
14 38
15 R x 8 39 T x 8
16 40
17 R x 9 41 T x 9
18 42
19 R x 10 43 T x 10
20 44
21 R x 11 45 T x 11
22 46
23 R x 12 47 T x 12
24 48
49 R x 13 73 T x 13
50 74
51 R x 14 75 T x 14
52 76
53 R x 15 77 T x 15
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage
54 78
55 R x 16 79 T x 16
56 80
3.15.5 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the ML1A/ML1B.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameters for the ML1A/ML1B:
l PDH interfacel PRBS Test
For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.
3.15.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the ML1A/ML1B include the interface specifications,dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 3-65 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the ML1A/ML1B.
Table 3-65 Specifications of the interfaces on the ML1A/ML1B
Item Specification Requirement
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048
Interface impedance 75 ohms (ML1A)120 ohms (ML1B)
Interface code HDB3
Pulse waveform at the output interface Complies with ITU-T G.703
Attenuation tolerance of the input interface atthe point with a frequency of 1024 kHz (dB)
0 to 6
Anti-interference capability of the inputinterface
Complies with ITU-T G.703
Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823
Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W)
Weight (kg): 0.44
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 9.5
3.16 TND2MD1A/TND2MD1BThis section describes the MD1A/MD1B, a 32-channel E1 electrical interface board, in termsof the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
NOTE
The mapping impedance of an interface on the MD1A is 75 ohm, and the mapping impedance of an interfaceon the MD1B is 120 ohm. Except the difference of mapping impedance, the functions and features of theMD1A and MD1B are the same.
3.16.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the MD1A/MD1B is TND2.
3.16.2 Functions and FeaturesThe MD1A/MD1B is an E1 interface board. The MD1A/MD1B must be used with the systemcontrol board to access and process 32 channels of E1 services. Services at interfaces on theMD1A/MD1B can be flexibly configured, and protocols such as ATM E1, IMA, CES, and ML-PPP are supported.
Table 3-66 lists the functions and features of the MD1A/MD1B.
Table 3-66 Functions and features of the MD1A/MD1B
Function and Feature Remarks
Basic functions Accesses and processes 32 x E1 signals and supports the ATM E1,IMA, CES, and ML-PPP protocols.
DCN Supports the in-band DCN. By default, the DCN function isenabled at the first and the thirty-second E1 ports. In addition, thisfunction can be disabled or enabled manually.
Interface functions Supports collection of bandwidth utilization statistics at an IMA/ML-PPP port.
Fractional E1 Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kbit/s level.
PRBS Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of an E1port in the receive/transmit direction.
ATM/IMA Number of supported IMAgroups/supported ATM E1 services
32
Maximum number of E1 linksor 64 kbit/s level serial ports ineach IMA group
16a
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
Function and Feature Remarks
Dynamically enables or disables the IMA group, restarts the IMAgroup protocol, and dynamically adds or deletes the IMA groupmembers.
Supported traffic types CBRUBRUBR+rt-VBRnrt-VBR
Number of supported ATMconnections(VPC and VCC included)
512 remote connections256 local connections
Number of supported ATMservices
64
Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-to-1(N≤32) or 1-to-1 format.
Encapsulates the ATM cells to the PW in the concatenation andnon-concatenation modes. The number of PW connections thatsupport the cell concatenation is 64, and the maximum number ofconcatenated cells is 31.
ATM OAM on the UNI side andNNI side
Supports the CC test.
Supports the LB test.
CES Number of supported CESservices
32
Supported emulation mode CESoPSNSAToP
Supports the timeslot compression function. Provides the idle 64kbit/s timeslot suppression function for the CES services in theCESoPSN mode to save the transmission bandwidth.
Supported clock modes Retiming modeSelf-adaptation mode
The jitter compensation buffer time of the CES service can be set.The jitter buffer time ranges from 0.375 ms to 16 ms, and the stepvalue is 0.125 ms.
The packet loading time of the CES service can be set. Theencapsulation buffer time ranges from ms to 3 ms, and the stepvalue is 0.125 ms.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
Function and Feature Remarks
ML-PPP Number of supported ML-PPPgroups
7
Maximum number of linkssupported by each ML-PPPgroup
16b
Functions as the NNI interface, and functions as the UNI interfaceto access IP packets of the L3VPN services.
NOTEa: In the case of the MD1A/MD1B, the links and 64 kbit/s timeslots corresponding to the former 16 andlatter 16 E1 ports cannot be bundled to an IMA group. If the former 16 E1 ports and the latter 16 E1 portsare configured in two different IMA groups, an ATM aggregation service from the two IMA groups to aPW is not allowed.
a: In the case of the MD1A/MD1B, the links corresponding to the former 16 and latter 16 E1 ports cannotbe bundled to an ML-PPP group.
3.16.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe MD1A/MD1B mainly consists of the service access module, service processing module,management module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 3-24 shows the functional block diagram of the MD1A/MD1B.
Figure 3-24 Functional block diagram of the MD1A/MD1B
Clock module
Power supply module
Service access module
Management module
32 x E1 Service signal Service processing
module
Service signal
Backplane
3.3V
1V
.
.
.
.
.
.
-48V/-60V
-48V/-60V
Line clocks
Line clocksSystem clocks
Management bus
Management bus
CXP
CXP
CXPCXP
System power supply
System power supply
Transmit DirectionThe service signals from the system control board are sent to the service processing module.The service processing module performs PWE3 decapsulation and PW scheduling for the servicesignals, processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols,
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
performs the E1 framing function, and sends the service signals to the service access module.The service access module performs encoding and line drive for the signals and outputs thesignals through the backplane-side interfaces.
Receive DirectionThe board accesses service signals through the backplane-side interfaces, and then the signalsare sent to the service access module. The service access module performs interference isolation,lightning-proof, impedance matching, level conversion, signal balancing, decoding, and thensends the processed signals to the service processing module. The service processing moduleperforms E1 framing, processes service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPPprotocols, implements PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and sends the signals to thesystem control board through the backplane-side interfaces.
Service Access ModuleThis module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module isolates common mode interference, protects circuitsagainst transient failures, matches the impedance in the receive direction with the internalimpedance, and performs level conversion, balancing, and decoding for the service signals.Finally, this module sends the processed signals to the service processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signals from the serviceprocessing module, encodes the signals, drives the line, and outputs the service signalsthrough the backplane-side interfaces.
l This module recovers the line clock.
Service Processing ModuleThis module performs the following functions:
l In the receive direction, this module receives the signals from the service access moduleand performs E1 framing. This module also identifies protocol types of the service signals,processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols (forexample, addition and deletion of IMA group members, VP/VC switching andconcatenation of ATM cells, vacant slot compression of CES services, and setup of ML-PPP groups). Then, this module performs PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, Finally,this module converts the processed signals to high-rate signals, and then sends the signalsto the system control board through the backplane-side interfaces.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the high-rate signals from the system controlboard through the backplane-side interfaces and recovers low-rate service signals. Then,this module performs PWE3 decapsulation, identifies different protocols and processes theservice signals,and completes E1 framing. Finally, this module sends the processed signalsto the service access module.
Management ModuleThis module manages and controls each module on the board.
Clock ModuleThis module performs the following functions:
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
l When used with the system control board, processes the recovered line clock.l Provides the working clock for each module on the board.
Power Supply ModuleThis module converts the input DC voltage into various DC voltages required by each moduleon the board.
3.16.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the MD1A/MD1B, there are indicators and interfaces.
Appearances of the Front PanelFigure 3-25 shows the appearances of the front panel of the MD1A and the MD1B.
Figure 3-25 Front panels of the MD1A and the MD1B
IndicatorsThe following indicators are present on the front panel of the MD1A/MD1B:
l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working statusl SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
For details on meanings of indicators, see B Indicators.
InterfacesThere are two Anea 96 interfaces on the front panel of the MD1A/MD1B. Table 3-67 lists thetype and usage of the interfaces. 7.5.2 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables and 7.5.3 120-Ohm 16 x E1Cables list the cables corresponding to the interfaces.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
Table 3-67 Type and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the MD1A/MD1B
Interface on theFrontPanel
Interface Type
Usage
MD1A MD1B
1 to 16 Anea 96 75-ohm interface, which is usedto transmit or receive the first tosixteenth channels of E1services.
120-ohm interface, which is usedto transmit or receive the first tosixteenth channels of E1services.
17 to 32 Anea 96 75-ohm interface, which is usedto transmit or receive theseventeenth to thirty-secondchannels of E1 services.
120-ohm interface, which is usedto transmit or receive theseventeenth to thirty-secondchannels of E1 services.
Table 3-68 lists the pins of the Anea 96 interface.
Table 3-68 Pins of the Anea 96 interface
Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage
1 R x 1 25 T x 1
2 26
3 R x 2 27 T x 2
4 28
5 R x 3 29 T x 3
6 30
7 R x 4 31 T x 4
8 32
9 R x 5 33 T x 5
10 34
11 R x 6 35 T x 6
12 36
13 R x 7 37 T x 7
14 38
15 R x 8 39 T x 8
16 40
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage
17 R x 9 41 T x 9
18 42
19 R x 10 43 T x 10
20 44
21 R x 11 45 T x 11
22 46
23 R x 12 47 T x 12
24 48
49 R x 13 73 T x 13
50 74
51 R x 14 75 T x 14
52 76
53 R x 15 77 T x 15
54 78
55 R x 16 79 T x 16
56 80
3.16.5 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the MD1A/MD1B.
You can use the U2000 to set the following parameters for the MD1A/MD1B:
l PDH interfacel PRBS Test
For details on the parameters, see F Board Configuration Parameters.
3.16.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the MD1A/MD1B include the interface specifications,dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 3-69 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the MD1A/MD1B.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
Table 3-69 Specifications of the interfaces on the MD1A/MD1B
Item Specification Requirement
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048
Interface impedance 75 ohms (MD1A)120 ohms (MD1B)
Interface code HDB3
Pulse waveform at the outputinterface
Complies with ITU-T G.703
Attenuation tolerance of the inputinterface at the point with afrequency of 1024 kHz (dB)
0 to 6
Anti-interference capability of theinput interface
Complies with ITU-T G.703
Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823
Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W)
Weight (kg): 0.49
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 12.1
3.17 TND1PIUThis section describes the TND1PIU, a power input unit, in terms of the version, functions,features, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
3.17.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PIU is TND1.
3.17.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PIU, a power access board, supports the functions and features such as power access, powerprotection, surge protection detection, and information reporting.
Table 3-70 lists functions and features of the PIU.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
Table 3-70 Functions and features of the PIU
Function and Feature Description
Power access Each of the two PIU accesses one -48 V DC (or -60 V DC) powersupply for the equipment.
Power protection The PIU protects the power supply against overcurrent and shortcircuit. In this way, the overcurrent is prevented from shockingboards and components on them.
surge protection The PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports analarm if the protection fails.
Power backup Two PIU can achieve 1+1 hot backup. One PIU is capable ofsupplying power for the entire chassis.
3.17.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe PIU mainly consists of the lighting protection and failure detection module, communicationunit module, and board in-position module.
Figure 3-26 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the PIU.
Figure 3-26 Block diagram for the working principle of the PIU
Communication unit module
Backplane
Inter-board communication bus
Slot ID module
Lightning protection and failure detection module
-48 V/-60 V
Board in-position signalsBoard in-position
module
Slot ID signals
CXP
CXP
CXP
Each boardLightning protection failure alarm
signals
NOTE
In Figure 3-26, the CXP on the backplane indicates the system control, cross-connect and protocolprocessing board. For OptiX PTN 960, the CXP indicates the TND3CXPA/TND3CXPB.
Lighting Protection and Failure Detection ModuleThis module protects the equipment against lightning and detects the failure of the anti-lightningcircuit. If the surge protection fails, the PIU reports the alarm signals to the TND3CXPA/TND3CXPB.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
Communication Unit Module
This module has the function of reporting the board manufacturing information, PCB versioninformation, and alarm signals about the surge protection failure.
Slot ID Module
This module reports the slot ID information to the TND3CXPA/TND3CXPB.
Board In-Position Module
This module reports the board in-position signals to the TND3CXPA/TND3CXPB.
3.17.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the PIU, there are indicators, a label and power supply interfaces..
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 3-27 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Figure 3-27 Appearance of the front panel of the PIU
Indicators
The following indicator is present on the front panel of the PIU.
PWR, green, which indicates the power supply status. When PWR is on and green, it indicatesthat power is accessed.
For details on indications of indicators, see B Indicators.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
Interfaces
The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 3-71 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIU andtheir respective usage. For cable corresponding to the interfaces, see 7.2 -48 V Power SupplyCable.
Table 3-71 Types and usage of the interfaces on the PIU
Interface on the FrontPanel
Usage
NEG(-) -48 V power input interface
RTN(+) BGND power input interface
Label
Operation warning label: indicates the following precaution, which should be taken for removalor insertion of the PIU board.
CAUTION
Multiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment,make sure that these power supplies are disabled.
Do not remove or insert the board with power on.
3.17.5 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the PIU cover the board dimensions, weight, power consumption,and input voltage.
Table 3-72 lists the technical specifications of the PIU.
Table 3-72 Technical specifications of the PIU
Item Technical Specification
Board dimensions (mm) 41.4 (H) x 229.9 (D) x 21.0 (W)
Weight (kg) 0.12
Power consumption (W, room temperature) 0.5
Input voltage (V) -38.4 to -72.0
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
3.18 TND1FANThis section describes the TND1FAN, a fan board, in terms of the version, functions, features,working principle, front panel, and technical specifications.
3.18.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the FAN is TND1.
3.18.2 Functions and FeaturesThe FAN is used to adjust the fan rotating speed, detect and report status of fans.
The functions and features of the FAN are as follows:
l Accesses two 12 V power supplies for driving six fans that each consumes 6 W power.l Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans, protects fans against overcurrent, and
filters the lower frequency.l Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of the
system.l Reports information about the fan rotating speed, environment temperature, alarms, version
number, and board in-position information.l Provides alarm indicators.
3.18.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe FAN mainly consists of the combiner/start-delay module, filter module, communicationunit module, intelligent fan speed adjustment module, and board in-position module.
Figure 3-28 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the FAN.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
Figure 3-28 Block diagram for the working principle of the FAN
Fans x 6
12 V power shut signals
12 V
Inter-board communication bus
Board in-position module
PWM signals
Communication unit module
CXP
Fan rotating speed signals
Fan in-position signals
12 V
12 V
12 V
Filter module
CXP
CXP
CXP
CXP
Combiner/soft-start module
CombinerStart-delay
12 V
CXP
Intelligent fan speed adjustment module
PWM driver module
Fan speed reporting module
Start-delay/Combiner Module
This module provides start delay to the combined two 12 V power supplies and protecting fansagainst overcurrent.
Filter Module
This module filters the LC low frequency to enhance the EMC feature of the system.
Communication Unit Module
This module reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version, and environmenttemperature information. In addition, this module provides 12 V power shut signals to the start-delay module.
Intelligent Fan Speed Adjustment Module
This module reports information about the fan rotating speed to the CXP and adjusts the fanrotating speed according to the six pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals received from theCXP. The PWM signal of one fan is isolated from that of another.
Board In-Position Module
This module reports the board in-position signals to the CXP.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
3.18.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the FAN, there are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, handle, and labels.
Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 3-29 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.
Figure 3-29 Appearance of the front panel of the FAN
IndicatorsThe following indicators are present on the front panel of the FAN:
l FAN indicator, red or green, which indicates status of fans.l CRIT indicator, red, which indicates critical alarms.l MAJ indicator, orange, which indicates major alarms.l MIN indicator, yellow, which indicates minor alarms.
The CRIT, MAJ, and MIN indicators on the front panel of the FAN indicate the current alarmseverity of the chassis.
For details on indications of indicators, see B Indicators.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
ESD Wrist Strap JackThe ESD wrist strap should be connected to this jack for proper grounding of the human body.
HandleThe handle is used for pushing the FAN into or pulling the FAN out of the chassis during boardreplacement.
LabelThe following labels are present on the front panel of the FAN:
l ESD protection label, which indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.l Fan warning label, which says that do not touch the fan leaves before the fan stops rotating.
3.18.5 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the FAN cover the board dimensions, weight, powerconsumption, and input voltage.
Table 3-73 lists the technical specifications of the FAN.
Table 3-73 Technical specifications of the FAN
Item Technical Specification
Board dimensions (mm) 86.2 (H) x 217.6 (D) x 28.5 (W)
Weight (kg) 0.302
Power consumption (W) l Low rate: 4.1l Medium rate: 13.6l High rate: 29.6
Working voltage (V) 12 V DC power
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
4 Filler Panel
About This Chapter
A filler panel is used to cover any vacant slot in a chassis.
4.1 Functions and FeaturesA filler panel can be used to perform electromagnetic shielding, keep out foreign substances,and ensure proper ventilation.
4.2 Appearance and Valid SlotsThere is no indicator or interface on a filler panel.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 4 Filler Panel
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
4.1 Functions and FeaturesA filler panel can be used to perform electromagnetic shielding, keep out foreign substances,and ensure proper ventilation.
Main functions of a filler panel are as follows:
l Performs electromagnetic shielding and ensures that the chassis meets the requirement ofelectromagnetic radiation.
l Prevents foreign substances from getting into the chassis.l Prevents internal circuit from being exposed.l Ensures proper ventilation of cooling current inside the chassis.
4.2 Appearance and Valid SlotsThere is no indicator or interface on a filler panel.
AppearanceFigure 4-1 shows the appearance of a filler panel.
Figure 4-1 Appearance of a filler panel
Valid SlotsA filler panel can be housed in any of slots 1-6 of a chassis.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 4 Filler Panel
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
5 Pluggable Optical Modules
About This Chapter
Optical interface boards for the OptiX PTN 960 use the enhanced small form-factor pluggable(eSFP) optical module and the 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (XFP) optical module.
The eSFP and XFP optical modules, which are protocol-independent optical transceiversapplicable to optical communication, implement O/E and E/O conversion for signals, andsupport query of information such as the transceiver performance and manufacturer.
5.1 Appearance and ApplicationThe appearances and application scenarios of the eSFP and XFP optical modules are different.
5.2 Optical Module LabelsOptical module labels, attached to the optical modules, are used to distinguish different types ofoptical modules.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 5 Pluggable Optical Modules
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
5.1 Appearance and ApplicationThe appearances and application scenarios of the eSFP and XFP optical modules are different.
AppearanceFigure 5-1 shows the appearance of the eSFP optical module; Figure 5-2 shows the appearanceof the XFP optical module.
Figure 5-1 Appearance example of the eSFP optical module
Two-fiber bidirectional optical module Single-fiber bidirectional optical module
Figure 5-2 Appearance example of the XFP optical module
Applicationlists the boards where the eSFP optical module is applicable.
Table 5-1 Boards where the eSFP optical module is applicable
Board Type Board Name
GE optical interface board EM4F, EM8F
FE optical interface board EM4F, EM8F
STM-1 optical interface board CQ1B, AQ1, SQ1
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 5 Pluggable Optical Modules
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
The XFP optical module is applicable to the 10GE optical interface board EX1.
5.2 Optical Module LabelsOptical module labels, attached to the optical modules, are used to distinguish different types ofoptical modules.
Figure 5-3 shows the optical module labels.
Figure 5-3 Optical module label
Optical module code
As shown in Table 5-2, different types of optical modules have different codes.
Table 5-2 Codes and types of optical modules
Optical ModuleCode
OpticalInterface Type
Optical Module Basic Information MappingBoard
34060313 10GBASE-LR(10 km)
Optical Transceiver, XFP, 1310 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 10.71 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km
TND1EX1
34060322 10GBASE-ER(40 km)
Optical Transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40 km
34060361 10GBASE-ZR(80 km)
Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/sto 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
34060547 10GBASE-CWDM(70 km)
Optical Transceiver XFP, 1471 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km
TND1EX1
34060548 10GBASE-CWDM(70 km)
Optical Transceiver XFP, 1491 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km
34060549 10GBASE-CWDM(70 km)
Optical Transceiver XFP, 1511 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 5 Pluggable Optical Modules
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
Optical ModuleCode
OpticalInterface Type
Optical Module Basic Information MappingBoard
34060550 10GBASE-CWDM(70 km)
Optical Transceiver XFP, 1531 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km
34060551 10GBASE-CWDM(70 km)
Optical Transceiver XFP, 1551 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km
34060552 10GBASE-CWDM(70 km)
Optical Transceiver XFP, 1571 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km
34060553 10GBASE-CWDM(70 km)
Optical Transceiver XFP, 1591 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km
34060554 10GBASE-CWDM(70 km)
Optical Transceiver XFP, 1611 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 70 km
34060286 1000BASE-SX(0.5 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 850 nm, 2.125 Gbit/s (Multi rate), LC, Multi-mode, 0.5 km
TND1EM4FTND1EM8F
34060473 1000BASE-LX(10 km)
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km
34060298 1000BASE-VX(40 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40 km
34060360 1000BASE-ZX(80 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
34060483 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1471 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
TND1EM4FTND1EM8F
34060481 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1491 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
34060479 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1511 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
34060482 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1531 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 5 Pluggable Optical Modules
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
Optical ModuleCode
OpticalInterface Type
Optical Module Basic Information MappingBoard
34060478 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1551 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
34060476 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1571 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
34060477 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1591 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
34060480 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1611 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
34060295 1000BASE-X(100 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 100 km
TND1EM4FTND1EM8F
34060276 100BASE-FX/S-1.1(15 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM1,LC, Single-mode, 15 km
TND1EM4FTND1EM8FTND1CQ1BTND2AQ1TND1SQ1
34060281 100BASE-FX/L-1.1(40 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM1,LC, Single-mode, 40 km
34060282 100BASE-FX/L-1.2(80 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, STM1,LC, Single-mode, 80 km
34060287 SFP-FE-SX-MM1310(2km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310nm, STM1,LC, Multi-mode, 2km
TND2AQ1TND1SQ1TND1CQ1B
34060475 1000BASE-BX(10 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/Rx1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km
TND1EM4FTND1EM8F
34060470 1000BASE-BX(10 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx1490 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km
34060539 1000BASE-BX(40 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx1490 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40 km
34060540 1000BASE-BX(40 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/Rx1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40 km
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 5 Pluggable Optical Modules
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
Optical ModuleCode
OpticalInterface Type
Optical Module Basic Information MappingBoard
34060595 1000BASE-BX(80 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1570 nm/Rx1490 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
TND1EM4FTND1EM8F
34060596 1000BASE-BX(80 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/Rx1570 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
34060364 100BASE-BX(10km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/Rx1310 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km
TND1EM4FTND1EM8FTND1D1CQ1BTND1SQ1
34060363 100BASE-BX(10km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx1550 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km
34060639 100BASE-BX(40km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/Rx1310 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km
34060638 100BASE-BX(40km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx1550 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 5 Pluggable Optical Modules
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power SupplySystem
About This Chapter
This section describes the EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply system in terms of theappearance, functions, front panel, and technical specifications.
6.1 Structure and FunctionsThe EPS30-4815AF external power supply system inputs 220 V/110 V AC power and convertsthe power to -53.5 V DC required by the OptiX PTN 960. When input of the 220 V/110 V ACpower stops, the EPS30-4815AF automatically switches to the storage battery, which providespower to the equipment. This ensures uninterrupted power supply to the equipment. TheEPS30-4815AF consists of the rectifier modules, monitoring module, and AC/DC powerdistribution frame.
6.2 Front PanelOn the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF, there are indicators, interfaces, and output branchfuses.
6.3 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF cover the input/output voltage, current,dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
6.1 Structure and FunctionsThe EPS30-4815AF external power supply system inputs 220 V/110 V AC power and convertsthe power to -53.5 V DC required by the OptiX PTN 960. When input of the 220 V/110 V ACpower stops, the EPS30-4815AF automatically switches to the storage battery, which providespower to the equipment. This ensures uninterrupted power supply to the equipment. TheEPS30-4815AF consists of the rectifier modules, monitoring module, and AC/DC powerdistribution frame.
Structure
Figure 6-1 shows the appearance of the EPS30-4815AF and Table 6-1 lists the components ofthe EPS30-4815AF.
Figure 6-1 Appearance of the EPS30-4815AF
CAUTIONThe interface DB50 on the monitoring module is reserved. Do not use the interface on themonitoring module; otherwise, the EPS30-4815AF will be reset or damaged.
Table 6-1 Components of the EPS30-4815AF
Component Description
Rectifier modules Converts AC power to DC power. The EPS30-4815AF can beconfigured with one or two rectifier modules.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
Component Description
Monitoring module Monitors the EPS30-4815AF and storage batteries. Two RS232/RS485 communication interfaces are provided and one DB50interface is reserved.
AC/DC power distributionframe
Provides an interface for inputting AC power, two loadinterfaces, and an interface for connecting to the storagebatteries, and the fuses that can be replaced.
FunctionsFunctions of the EPS30-4815AF are as follows:
l Provides an interface for inputting AC power to provide 220 V/110 V AC power to theequipment.
l Provides two hot-pluggable rectifier modules to convert AC power to DC power. The tworectifier modules work at the same time in load-sharing mode and they are hot backups foreach other.The EPS30-4815AF is configured with one or two rectifier modules. When one rectifiermodule is configured, the maximum output current is 15 A; when two rectifier modulesare configured, the maximum output current is 30 A.
NOTE
A filler panel must be inserted into an empty slot intended for a rectifier module.
l Provides an active and a standby RS232/RS485 communication interfaces, enables thedevice to monitor the AC input status of the EPS30–4815 power supply system, andreserves one DB50 interface for later extension of the monitoring function.
l Provides two load interfaces for outputting -53.5 V DC power to two PIUs, which providepower to the OptiX PTN 960.
l Provides two load control fuses, that is, FU-1 with a fuse capacity of 10 A and FU-2 witha fuse capacity of 20 A. These fuses enable/disable output of the load and provide overloadand short-circuit protection for the load.
l Provides one interface for connecting to a group of storage batteries. When workingnormally, the EPS30-4815AF is charging the storage batteries. When input of the 220 V/110 V AC power stops, the storage batteries provide power to the OptiX PTN 960. Thisensures uninterrupted power supply to the OptiX PTN 960.Figure 6-2 shows the appearance of a storage battery and Figure 6-3 shows a storagebattery tray with storage batteries.
l Provides a storage battery protection fuse, that is, FU-3 with a fuse capacity of 20 A. Thisfuse enables/disables the storage batteries and provides overload and short-circuitprotection for the storage batteries.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
Figure 6-2 Appearance of a storage battery
Figure 6-3 Appearance of a storage battery tray with storage batteries
Storage battery
Tray
6.2 Front PanelOn the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF, there are indicators, interfaces, and output branchfuses.
Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 6-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF.
Figure 6-4 Appearance of the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
IndicatorsIndicators for the rectifier and monitoring modules are present on the front panel of theEPS30-4815AF. Table 6-2 and Table 6-3 list the indications of indicators for the rectifier andmonitoring modules respectively.
Table 6-2 Indicators for the rectifier modules
Indicator Indication Color NormalState
AbnormalState
Cause of Exception
RUN Runningindicator
Green On Off The rectifier modules are runningnormally.
ALM Protectionindicator
Yellow Off On A fault that can be rectified occurs ona rectifier module.
Blinking Communication on a rectifier moduleis interrupted.
FAULT Faultindicator
Red Off On A fault that cannot be rectified occurson a rectifier module.
Note 1: When a severe fault occurs, the indicator (red) is on and the indicators (yellow and green) are off. Theindicators (yellow and green) are on only when the indicator (red) is off.Note 2: The indicator (yellow) is always on when communication on a rectifier module is interrupted, a rectifiermodule is overheated or endures overcurrent or undercurrent, or a rectifier module is disabled.
Table 6-3 Indicators for the monitoring module
Indicator
Indication
Color NormalState
Abnormal State
Cause of Exception
RUN Runningindicator
Green Blinking at1 sinternals
Off The monitoring module isrunning abnormally.
Blinkingat 125 msinternals
Abnormal communication
ALM Alarmindicator
Red Off On The EPS30-4815AF reports analarm.
InterfacesTable 6-4 lists types and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
Table 6-4 Interfaces on the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF
InterfaceName
Number ofInterfaces
InterfaceType
Description Remarks
AC INPUT 1 - 220 V/110 V AC power inputinterface
-
RS232/RS485 2 RJ-45 RS232/RS485communication interfaces.The monitoring modulecommunicates with theequipment, reports alarms,and implements remotecontrol through theseinterfaces.The interface on the left is theactive interface and theinterface on the right is thestandby interface. The activeand standby interfaces cannotbe used at the same time.
It is recommended to use the activeinterface.
COM 1 DB50 The monitoring module isconnected to various sensorsthrough the COM interface.
Reserved interface
LOAD1 1 - Output interface for load 1 LOAD1 and LOAD2 provide DCpower for two PIUs. For how toconnect the load interfaces to thePIUs, see Overview of Devices in theOptiX PTN 960 Installation Guide.The pins marked with + and - areconnected to the 48V+ and 48V-poles of the cable connectorrespectively.Table 6-6 lists the relationships of theload output interfaces, interface forconnecting to the storage batteries,and fuses.
LOAD2 1 - Output interface for load 2
BATT 1 - Interface for connecting to thestorage batteries
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
Table 6-5 Pins of the RS232/RS485 communication interface used as a monitoring signal input/output interface
Front View Pin Description
18 24 3567
1 Transmit positive in RS485 communicationmode
2 Transmit negative in RS485 communicationmode
3 -
4 Receive positive in RS485 communicationmode
5 Receive negative in RS485 communicationmode
6 -
7 Grounding end
8 Grounding end
Note 1: The power supply system and the ATN device can communicate in two modes: RS232and RS485. The specific communication mode is determined by the DIP switch on themonitoring module. For details on the DIP switch, seeDIP Switch. Only in RS485communication mode, the device can monitor the AC power input status of the power supplysystem.Note 2: The RS485 communication mode applies only when the power supply system andthe PTN device use the primary/secondary node communication protocol to communicatewith each other.
Output branch fusesThere are three replaceable fuses on the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF. The fuses disable/enable the load and storage batteries, and provide overload and short-circuit protection for theload and storage batteries.
Table 6-6 Relationships of the load output interfaces, interface for connecting to the storagebatteries, and fuses
Output Branch Fuse Load Branch
FU-1 (10 A) LOAD1 (10 A)
FU-2 (20 A) LOAD2 (20 A)
FU-BT (20 A) BATT (20 A)
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
DIP Switch
There is a DIP switch on the monitoring module of the EPS30-4815AF. Figure 6-5 shows thedefault setting and location of the DIP switch.
Figure 6-5 Default setting and location of the DIP switch
CAUTIONDo not change the default setting of the DIP switch. Otherwise, the EPS30-4815AF is affected.
The DIP switch indicates eight bits in binary format (on: 1; off: 0). The default value of the eightbits is 00000100. The functions of the eight bits are as follows:
l The first five bits indicate the local and remote power addresses. Bit 5 is the highest bit andbit 1 is the lowest bit.
l Bit 6 sets the baud rate of communication between the monitoring module and equipment.When bit 6 is 1, the baud rate is 9600 bit/s; when bit 6 is 0, the baud rate is 19200 bit/s.
l Bits 7 and 8 are reserved.
6.3 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF cover the input/output voltage, current,dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 6-7 lists the technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF.
Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF
Item Specification
AC input Rated input voltage 220/110 (90 to 280) V AC
Maximum inputcurrent
10 A
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Battery input Rated input voltage 48 V
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
Item Specification
Capacity 40 Ah
Number ofbatteries
4
DC output Rated outputvoltage
-53.5 V DC
Output current LOAD1: 10 A (determined by the fuse)LOAD 2: 20 A (determined by the fuse)
Dimensions of the EPS30-4815AF(mounting ears included)
43.6 mm (H) x 482.6 mm (W) x 270 mm (D)
Weight of the EPS30-4815AF < 10 kg
Dimensions of a battery 170 mm (H) x 197 mm (W) x 165 mm (D)
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 6 EPS30-4815AF External AC Power Supply System
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
7 Fibers and Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes various fibers and cables used on the equipment, including fibers, powercables, grounding cables, service cables, management cables, clock cables, and alarm cables.
7.1 FibersThis section describes the types of fibers and fiber connectors.
7.2 -48 V Power Supply CableThe OptiX PTN 960 uses 2 U DC connectors to receive external power.
7.3 Power Cable for the EPS30-4815AFThe EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply inputs external power supplies through ACpower cables. The EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply is connected to the OptiX PTN960 and batteries through DC power cables.
7.4 PGND CablesPGND cables are used to ground the OptiX PTN 960.
7.5 Service CablesThe service cables include Ethernet cables, 75-ohm 16 x E1 cables, 120-ohm 16 x E1 cables,and telephone wires.
7.6 Management CablesOn the OptiX PTN 960, Ethernet cables are used to input and output NM signals.
7.7 Clock CablesThe clock cables used on the OptiX PTN 960 include external clock cables and 120-to-75-ohmclock cables.
7.8 Alarm Input/Output CablesOn the OptiX PTN 960, the RJ45 connectors are used to input the alarm signals from the externalequipment and output the local alarm signals to the equipment that monitors all the alarms.
7.9 AC Power Monitoring and Alarm-reporting Cable
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
The AC power monitoring and alarm-reporting cable is used to connect the alarm monitoringinterface on the external AC power supply module EPS30-4815AFor extended chassis and theAC power monitoring interface on the SCC board.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
7.1 FibersThis section describes the types of fibers and fiber connectors.
7.1.1 Fiber TypesSingle-mode fibers or multi-mode fibers can be used on the OptiX PTN 960.
Table 7-1 lists the types of fibers used on the OptiX PTN 960.
Table 7-1 Types of Fiber
Connector Fiber
Connector 1 Connector 2 Outerdiameter
Mode oftransmission Type
LC/PC
LC/PC2 mm
Single-mode G.652D
Multi-mode A1B
0.9 mm Single-mode G.652D
SC/PC 2 mmSingle-mode G.652D
Multi-mode A1B
FC/PC 2 mm Single-mode G.652D
LC/APCLC/APC 2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
N/A 2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
LC/UPC
LC/UPC 2 mmSingle-mode G.657A2
Single-mode G.652D
LC/APC 1.6mm Single-mode G.657B3
SC/UPC 2 mmSingle-mode G.657A2
Single-mode G.652D
SC/APC 2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
FC/UPC2 mm
Single-mode G.657A2
Single-mode G.652D
1.6mm Single-mode G.657B3
N/A 2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
SC/PC SC/PC 3 mmSingle-mode G.652D
Multi-mode A1B
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
Connector Fiber
Connector 1 Connector 2 Outerdiameter
Mode oftransmission Type
FC/PC 3 mm Single-mode G.652D
N/A 3 mm Single-mode G.652D
SC/APC
SC/PC 3 mm Single-mode G.652D
SC/APC3 mm Single-mode G.652D
2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
N/A0.9 mm Single-mode G.657A2
2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
SC/UPC
LC/UPC 0.9 mm Single-mode G.652D
SC/UPC 2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
N/A0.9 mm Single-mode G.657A2
2 mm Single-mode G.657A2
FC/PC
LC/PC 2 mmSingle-mode G.652D
Multi-mode A1B
FC/PC 3 mm Single-mode G.652D
SC/PC 3 mmSingle-mode G.652D
Multi-mode A1B
N/A 3 mm Single-mode G.652D
All the optical interfaces on PTN equipment are LC interfaces. Select the fiber connector andthe fiber length according to the on-site survey.
7.1.2 Common Fiber ConnectorsThe common fiber connectors of the LC/PC, FC/PC, and SC/PC types are applicable to theOptiX PTN 960.
Table 7-2 lists the types and usage of the common fiber connectors applicable to the equipment.
Table 7-2 Usage and types of fiber connectors
Type Description Usage
LC/PC Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished
Used at the optical interfaces on all theboards on the OptiX PTN equipment
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
Type Description Usage
FC/PC Round fiber connector/protrudingpolished
Used at the client-side ODF or the opticalinterfaces on other equipment
SC/PC Square fiber connector/protrudingpolished
LC/PC Fiber ConnectorFigure 7-1 shows the appearance of the LC/PC fiber connector.
Figure 7-1 LC/PC fiber connector
Only axial operations instead of rotation is required to insert or remove the LC/PC fiberconnector. To insert or remove an LC/PC fiber connector, do as follows:
l To insert the fiber jumper into the LC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper withthe optical interface and then push the fiber jumper with proper force into the connector.
l To remove the LC/PC fiber jumper, press the clip first, push the fiber connector inwardslightly, and then pull out the connector.
FC/PC Fiber ConnectorFigure 7-2 shows the appearance of the FC/PC fiber connector.
Figure 7-2 FC/PC fiber connector
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
To insert or remove an FC/PC fiber connector, do as follows:
l To insert the fiber jumper into the FC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper withthe optical interface carefully, to avoid any damage to the internal ceramic pipe. Afterinserting the fiber jumper to the bottom of the optical interface, clockwise rotate the externalscrew to tighten the fiber jumper into the optical interface.
l To remove the fiber jumper, first anticlockwise rotate the external screw of the opticalinterface. When the screw is loosened, remove the fiber jumper with proper force from theoptical interface.
SC/PC Fiber ConnectorFigure 7-3 shows the appearance of the SC/PC fiber connector.
Figure 7-3 SC/PC fiber connector
To insert or remove an SC/PC fiber connector, do as follows.
l To insert the fiber jumper into the SC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper withthe optical interface and then push the fiber jumper with proper force into the connector.
l To remove the fiber jumper, press the clip first, push the fiber connector inward slightly,and then pull out the connector.
7.2 -48 V Power Supply CableThe OptiX PTN 960 uses 2 U DC connectors to receive external power.
Power cables need to be produced on site. The power cables are made of 2U DC connectors,single cord end terminals, and wires. Figure 7-4 shows the appearance of a power cable. Thetechnical specifications of the power cable are listed in Table 7-3.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
Figure 7-4 Appearance of the power cable
screwdriver
2U DC connector
-48V cable (blue)
0V cable (black)
Table 7-3 Technical specifications of the power cable
Item Wire Related Parameter Terminal Related Parameter
4 mm2 powercable andterminal
Power Cable, 450/750 V, H07Z-K UL3386, 4 mm2, Blue/Black,Low Smoke Zero HalogenCable
Common Terminal, Single Cord EndTerminal, 4 mm2, 20 A, Insertion Depth10 mm, Grey
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX PTN 960 equipment, there are following limitations on mapping relations betweenthe cable length and the cross-sectional area.
If the cross-sectional area is 4 mm2, the maximum cable length is 10 m.
7.3 Power Cable for the EPS30-4815AFThe EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply inputs external power supplies through ACpower cables. The EPS30-4815AF external AC power supply is connected to the OptiX PTN960 and batteries through DC power cables.
StructureFigure 7-5 shows an AC input power cable connecting the mains to the EPS30-4815AF.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
Figure 7-5 AC input power cable connecting the mains to the EPS30-4815AF
Figure 7-6 shows a power cable connecting the EPS30-4815AF to the output terminal of astorage battery.
Figure 7-6 Power cable connecting the EPS30-4815AF to the output terminal of a storage battery
W1 (Blue)
Main label
View A
A1234
W2 (Blue)
W3 (Black)W4 (Black)
X1 X3
X2
Figure 7-7 shows a short-circuiting cable for storage batteries.
Figure 7-7 Short-circuiting cable for storage batteries
X1 X2W1
Main label
Figure 7-8 shows a power cable connecting the EPS30-4815AF to the PIU.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
Figure 7-8 Power cable connecting the EPS30-4815AF to the PIU
W1 (Blue)
Main label
View A
A1234
W2 (Blue)
W3 (Black)W4 (Black)
X1 X3
X2
Technical Specifications
Cable Item Description
Power cable forinputting the mains
Cable type (PI Straight Male)-(227IEC53-1.0^2(3C))-(C13 Straight Female)
Technicalspecifications of thecable
International AC 250 V 10 A-3.00 m-3 x 1.0mm2-Black
Fireproof class CM
Output power cableconnecting to theterminal of a storagebattery
Cable type (H4(5.08))-(2 x 18UL3385 Blue + 2 x18UL3385 Black)-(2 x OT2.5-6)
Technicalspecifications of theX1 connector
Ordinary plug, 4PIN, single row /5.08 mm
Technicalspecifications of theW1/W2 wire
Electronic and Power Cable, 300 V, UL3385,0.81 mm2, 18AWG, Blue, 15 A, Low SmokeZero Halogen Cable
Technicalspecifications of theW3/W4 wire
Electronic and Power Cable, 300 V, UL3385,0.81 mm2, 18AWG, Black, 15 A, Low SmokeZero Halogen Cable
Technicalspecifications of theX2/X3 terminal
Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 2.5mm2, M6,Tin Plating, Insulated Ring Terminal, 16 to14AWG, Blue
Fireproof class CM
Short-circuitingcable for a storagebattery
Cable type (OT2.5-5)-(14UL1015 Black)-(OT2.5-5)
Technicalspecifications of theX1/X2 terminal
Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 2.5mm2, M5,Tin Plating, Insulated Ring Terminal, 16 to14AWG, Blue
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
Cable Item Description
Technicalspecifications of theW1 wire
Wire, 600 V, 14AWG, Black, UL1015
Fireproof class CM
Output power cableconnecting to thePIU
Cable type (H4(5.08))-(2 x 18UL1015 Blue + 2 x18UL1015 Black)-(2 x Cord End 2.0^2Yellow (2 x 1.0))
Technicalspecifications of theX1 connector
Ordinary plug, 4PIN, single row /5.08 mm
Technicalspecifications of theW1/W2 wire
Wire, 600 V, 18AWG, Blue, UL1015
Technicalspecifications of theW3/W4 wire
Wire, 600 V, 18AWG, Black, UL1015
Technicalspecifications of theX2/X3 terminal
Naked Crimping Terminal, Twin Cord EndTerminal, 2 mm2, Insertion Depth 8 mm, 23A,Tin Plating, Yellow, 2 x 1.0 mm2
Fireproof class CM
Note 1: A power cable is named in the format of "Connector 1 Type-Cable Material Type-Connector 2 Type".Note 2: The specifications of power cables for inputting the mains vary in different countriesor regions. In this document, the AC power cables complying with international standards areconsidered as examples.
7.4 PGND CablesPGND cables are used to ground the OptiX PTN 960.
PGND cables are made of wires and OT terminals. Figure 7-9 shows the appearance of a PGNDcable. The technical specifications of the PGND cable are listed in Table 7-4.
Figure 7-9 Appearance of the PGND cable
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
Table 7-4 Technical specifications of the PGND cable
Wire Related Parameter Terminal Related Parameter
Power Cable, 450 V/750 V, H07Z-K UL3386, 4mm2,Yellow Green, Low Smoke Zero HalogenCable
Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M8, Tin Plating,Insulated Ring Terminal, 12 to 10AWG, Yellow
Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M4, Tin Plating,Insulated Ring Terminal, 12 to 10AWG, Yellow
Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M6, Tin Plating,Insulated Ring Terminal, 12 to 10AWG, Yellow
7.5 Service CablesThe service cables include Ethernet cables, 75-ohm 16 x E1 cables, 120-ohm 16 x E1 cables,and telephone wires.
7.5.1 Ethernet CablesOn the OptiX PTN 960, Ethernet cables are used to input and output Ethernet service signals.
Ethernet cables are also referred to as network cables and can be classified into straight-throughcables and crossover cables according to the connection sequence of the copper cores in thecables.
The Ethernet service interfaces on the equipment are adaptive to the straight-through cables andcrossover cables. Hence, you can connect either type of the network cables to the Ethernet serviceinterfaces as required.
Ethernet cables need to be made on site.
StructureFigure 7-10 shows the appearance of the network cable.
Figure 7-10 Appearance of the network cable
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
RJ45 connectors are used at both ends of a network cable. Figure 7-11 shows an RJ45 connectorand Figure 7-12 shows the structure of the network cable.
Figure 7-11 RJ45 connector
PIN#1PIN#8
Figure 7-12 Structure of the network cable
Label 1Main label Label 2
W
X1 X2
8
1
8
1
RJ-45 network interface connector Ethernet
cable
NOTE
For a crossover cable, pins 1 and 2 of the RJ45 connector at one end must be cross-connected to pins 3 and6 of the RJ45 connector at the other end respectively.
Pin Assignment
Table 7-5 and Table 7-6 list the pin assignment of the network cable connector.
Table 7-5 Pin assignment of the straight-through cable connector
Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relation
X1.1 X2.1 White-orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White-green Twisted pair
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relation
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White-blue
X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Table 7-6 Pin assignment of the crossover cable connector
FE Crossover Cable GE Crossover Cable
Connector X1Pin
Connector X2Pin
Color Relation
Connector X1Pin
Connector X2Pin
Color Relation
X1.1 X2.1 White-orange
Twistedpair
X1.1 X2.3 White-orange
Twistedpair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange X1.2 X2.6 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White-green
Twistedpair
X1.3 X2.1 White-green
Twistedpair
X1.6 X2.6 Green X1.6 X2.2 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twistedpair
X1.4 X2.7 Blue Twistedpair
X1.5 X2.5 White-blue
X1.5 X2.8 White-blue
X1.7 X2.7 White-brown
Twistedpair
X1.7 X2.4 White-brown
Twistedpair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown X1.8 X2.5 Brown
Technical Specifications
Table 7-7 lists the technical specifications of the network cable. For the technical specificationsof connector X1/X2, see Figure 7-12 and Figure 7-10.
Table 7-7 Technical specifications of the network cable
Item Specification
ConnectorX1/X2
Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8-Pin, Crystal Plug
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
Item Specification
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e UTP, 0.51 mm, 24AWG, 8 Cores,PANTONE 430U
Number ofcores
Eight
7.5.2 75-Ohm 16 x E1 CablesOn the OptiX PTN 960, Anea96 connectors are used to input and output 75-ohm E1 signals.
At one end of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable, the Anea96 connector is used to connect the 75-ohmE1 electrical interface on the board; the other end is connected to the digital distribution frame(DDF). Make the connector as required on site.
StructureFigure 7-13 shows the appearance of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable and Figure 7-14 shows thestructure of the cable.
Figure 7-13 Appearance of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
Figure 7-14 Structure of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable
Main label
1W
X1 A
View A
Pos .1
Pos.96Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN,
Female Connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-8 lists the pin assignment of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable connector.
Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable connector
Connector Pin
Cable Remarks Connector Pin
Cable Remarks
Core Serial No. Core Serial No.
1 Tip 1 R0 25 Tip 2 T0
2 Ring 26 Ring
3 Tip 3 R1 27 Tip 4 T1
4 Ring 28 Ring
5 Tip 5 R2 29 Tip 6 T2
6 Ring 30 Ring
7 Tip 7 R3 31 Tip 8 T3
8 Ring 32 Ring
9 Tip 9 R4 33 Tip 10 T4
10 Ring 34 Ring
11 Tip 11 R5 35 Tip 12 T5
12 Ring 36 Ring
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
Connector Pin
Cable Remarks Connector Pin
Cable Remarks
Core Serial No. Core Serial No.
13 Tip 13 R6 37 Tip 14 T6
14 Ring 38 Ring
15 Tip 15 R7 39 Tip 16 T7
16 Ring 40 Ring
17 Tip 17 R8 41 Tip 18 T8
18 Ring 42 Ring
19 Tip 19 R9 43 Tip 20 T9
20 Ring 44 Ring
21 Tip 21 R10 45 Tip 22 T10
22 Ring 46 Ring
23 Tip 23 R11 47 Tip 24 T11
24 Ring 48 Ring
49 Tip 25 R12 73 Tip 26 T12
50 Ring 74 Ring
51 Tip 27 R13 75 Tip 28 T13
52 Ring 76 Ring
53 Tip 29 R14 77 Tip 30 T14
54 Ring 78 Ring
55 Tip 31 R15 79 Tip 32 T15
56 Ring 80 Ring
Shell External braid shield layer
Technical Specifications
Table 7-9 Technical specifications of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable
Item Specification
Cable Trunk Cable, 75ohm, 16E1, 1.6mm,Anea 96F-I,SYFVZP75-1.1/0.26*32(S), +45deg
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
Item Specification
Connector Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Suite Of Female Connector AndShielding Case, IDC Type, For 28-30 AWG Solid Wire, 1 A
Cable type Coaxial Cable, SYFVZP-MC 75-1-1*32, 75 ohm, 12.40 mm, 1.1mm, 0.26 mm, Pantone Warm Gray 1U, Only for OEM
Diameter of the shieldlayer - diameter of theinternal insulationlayer - diameter of theinternal conductor
12.4 mm - 1.6 mm - 0.26 mm
Number of cores 32
Available length 5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, 50 m
7.5.3 120-Ohm 16 x E1 CablesOn the OptiX PTN 960, Anea96 connectors are used to input and output 120-ohm E1 signals.
At one end of the a 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable, the Anea96 connector is used to connect the 120-ohm E1 electrical interface on the board; the other end is connected to the DDF. Make theconnector as required on site.
StructureFigure 7-15 shows the appearance of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable and Figure 7-16 shows thestructure of the cable.
Figure 7-15 Appearance of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
Figure 7-16 Structure of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable
Main label
1W
X1 A
View A
Pos .1
Pos.96Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN,
Female Connector
Pin assignment
Table 7-10 lists the pin assignment of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable connector.
Table 7-10 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable connector
Connector Pin
Cable Remarks
Connector Pin
Cable Remarks
Core Relationship
TapeColor
Core Relationship
TapeColor
1 White Twistedpair
Blue R0 25 White Twistedpair
Blue T0
2 Blue 26 Orange
3 White Twistedpair
R1 27 White Twistedpair
T1
4 Green 28 Brown
5 White Twistedpair
R2 29 Red Twistedpair
T2
6 Grey 30 Blue
7 Red Twistedpair
R3 31 Red Twistedpair
T3
8 Orange 32 Green
9 Red Twistedpair
R4 33 Red Twistedpair
T4
10 Brown 34 Grey
11 Black Twistedpair
R5 35 Black Twistedpair
T5
12 Blue 36 Orange
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
Connector Pin
Cable Remarks
Connector Pin
Cable Remarks
Core Relationship
TapeColor
Core Relationship
TapeColor
13 Black Twistedpair
R6 37 Black Twistedpair
T6
14 Green 38 Brown
15 Black Twistedpair
R7 39 Yellow Twistedpair
T7
16 Grey 40 Blue
17 White Twistedpair
Orange R8 41 White Twistedpair
Orange T8
18 Blue 42 Orange
19 White Twistedpair
R9 43 White Twistedpair
T9
20 Green 44 Brown
21 White Twistedpair
R10 45 Red Twistedpair
T10
22 Grey 46 Blue
23 Red Twistedpair
R11 47 Red Twistedpair
T11
24 Orange 48 Green
49 Red Twistedpair
R12 73 Red Twistedpair
T12
50 Brown 74 Grey
51 Black Twistedpair
R13 75 Black Twistedpair
T13
52 Blue 76 Orange
53 Black Twistedpair
R14 77 Black Twistedpair
T14
54 Green 78 Brown
55 Black Twistedpair
R15 79 Yellow Twistedpair
T15
56 Grey 80 Blue
Shell External braid shield layer
Technical Specifications
Table 7-11 Technical specifications of the 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable
Item Specification
Cable Trunk Cable, 120 ohm, 16E1, 0.4 mm, Anea 96F,120CC32P0.4P430U(S), +45deg
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
Item Specification
Connector Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Suite Of Female Connector AndShielding Case, IDC Type, For 24-26 AWG Solid Wire - 1 A
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 120 ohm, SEYVP, 0.4 mm, 26AWG, 32Pairs,Pantone 430U
Core diameter of theinner conductor
0.4 mm
Number of cores 32 twisted pairs
Available length 5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, 50 m
7.6 Management CablesOn the OptiX PTN 960, Ethernet cables are used to input and output NM signals.
The management cables for the OptiX PTN 960 include Ethernet cables.
l Ethernet cables are classified into straight-through cables and crossover cables, and areused for communication between the equipment and the NMS computer. Both the NMinterface on the equipment is adaptive to a straight-through cable or a crossover cable.
Ethernet Cables
Figure 7-17 shows an RJ45 connector used at the end of the Ethernet cable.
When the cable is connected to the ETH/OAM interface, the pin assignment of the RJ45connector is as listed in Table 7-12.
Table 7-13 lists the technical specifications of the Ethernet cable.
Figure 7-17 RJ45 connector
PIN#1PIN#8
Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (ETH/OAM)
Connector Pin
Color Relation Usage
1 White-orange Twisted pair Transmit positive of the NM interface
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
Connector Pin
Color Relation Usage
2 Orange Transmit negative of the NM interface
3 White-green Twisted pair Receive positive of the NM interface
6 Green Receive negative of the NM interface
4 Blue Twisted pair Grounding end of the NM serial interface
5 White-blue Receive end of the NM serial interface
7 White-brown Twisted pair Unspecified
8 Brown Transmit end of the NM serial interface
Table 7-13 Technical specifications of the Ethernet cable
Item Specification
Connector Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8-Pin, Crystal Plug
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e UTP, 0.51 mm, 24AWG, 8Cores, PANTONE 430U
Number of cores Eight
7.7 Clock CablesThe clock cables used on the OptiX PTN 960 include external clock cables and 120-to-75-ohmclock cables.
7.7.1 External Clock CablesOn the OptiX PTN 960, the external clock cables with RJ45 connectors are used to input andoutput the external clock or time signals.
The external clock cables can be connected to the CLK and TOD interfaces on the OptiX PTN960.
The external clock cables must be made on the equipment installation site.
StructureFigure 7-18 shows the structure of the RJ45 connector used on the external clock cable.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
Figure 7-18 Structure of the RJ45 Connector
PIN#1PIN#8
Pin Assignment
The external clock cables must be made on the equipment installation site. The pin assignmentof the CLK interface is as listed in Table 7-14; the pin assignment of the TOD interface is aslisted in Table 7-15.
Table 7-14 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (input and output, external clock mode)
ConnectorPin
Color Relationship Description
1 White-orange Twisted pair Receive negative of CLK
2 Orange Receive positive of CLK
3 White-green Twisted pair Unspecified
6 Green Unspecified
4 Blue Twisted pair Transmit negative of CLK
5 White-blue Transmit positive of CLK
7 White- brown Twisted pair Unspecified
8 Brown Unspecified
Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (external time mode)
Connector Pin
Color Relationship
Description
1PPS + TimeInformation Mode
DCLS Mode
1 White-orange Twisted pair Unspecified Unspecified
2 Orange Unspecified Unspecified
3 White-green Twisted pair Negative of 1PPSsignals
Negative of DCLSsignals
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
Connector Pin
Color Relationship
Description
1PPS + TimeInformation Mode
DCLS Mode
6 Green Positive of 1PPSsignals
Positive of DCLSsignals
4 Blue Twisted pair Grounding terminal Grounding terminal
5 White-blue Grounding terminal Grounding terminal
7 White-brown Twisted pair Negative of timeinformation
Unspecified
8 Brown Positive of timeinformation
Unspecified
Technical SpecificationsTable 7-16 lists the technical specifications of the external clock cable.
Table 7-16 Technical specifications of the external clock cable
Item Specification
Connector Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Crystal Model Connector
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e, 0.52 mm, 24AWG, 8 Cores, 4Pairs, PANTONE 430U
Number ofcores
Eight
7.7.2 Clock Bridging CableOn the OptiX PTN 960, the 120-to-75-ohm clock cable is used as the clock bridging cable.
StructureFigure 7-19 shows the structure of the 120-to-75-ohm clock bridging cable.
Figure 7-19 Structure of the clock bridging cable
RJ-45 connector
Main label Heat-shrink tube
120-ohm or 75-ohm conversion
connector Label
View A
18
30 m
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5A
X1
Heat-shrink tube
Heat-shrink tube
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
Pin AssignmentTable 7-17 lists the pin assignment of the clock bridging cable connector.
Table 7-17 Pin assignment of the clock bridging cable connector
120-Ohm Cable 75-Ohm Cable
Connector Pin Color Relation Core No.
X1.1 Orange Twisted pair W1
X1.2 White
X1.4 Blue Twisted pair W2
X1.5 White
X1.3 Green Twisted pair W3
X1.6 White
X1.7 White Twisted pair W4
X1.8 Brown
Technical SpecificationsTable 7-18 lists the technical specifications of the clock bridging cable.
Table 7-18 Technical specifications of the clock bridging cable
Item Specification
Cable Single Cable, 120 ohm To 75 ohm Clock Cable, 30 m, MP8-II,120CC4P0.4P430U(S)+4*SYV75-2/0.34(S)
Connector X1type
Network Interface Connector,8-Bit 8PIN, Crystal Model Connector
120-ohm cabletype
Twisted-Pair Cable, 120 ohm, SEYVP, 0.4 mm, 26AWG, 4Pairs, Pantone430U
75-ohm cabletype
Coaxial Cable, SYV-75-2-2(4.0Z)-1/0.34 mm, OD3.9 mm, Double-LayerCopper Braid Shielded
Cable length 30 m
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
7.8 Alarm Input/Output CablesOn the OptiX PTN 960, the RJ45 connectors are used to input the alarm signals from the externalequipment and output the local alarm signals to the equipment that monitors all the alarms.
At one end of the alarm input/output cable, the RJ45 connector is used to connect to the ALMI/O interface on the equipment; at the other end, a connector (made as required on site) is used toconnect to the external equipment or the equipment that monitors all the alarms.
Structure
Figure 7-20 shows the structure of the alarm input/output cable.
Figure 7-20 Structure of the alarm input/output cable
Main label
W
X1
8
1
RJ-45 Connector
Pin Assignment
lists the pin assignment of the alarm input/output alarm cable connector.
Table 7-19 Pin assignment of the alarm input/output cable connector
ConnectorPin
Color Relation Description
1 White-orange Twisted pair Alarm input 1
2 Orange Ground for alarm input 1
3 White-green Twisted pair Alarm input 2
6 Green Ground for alarm input 2
4 Blue Twisted pair Alarm input 3
5 White-blue Ground for alarm input 3
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
ConnectorPin
Color Relation Description
7 White- brown Twisted pair Positive for critical or major alarmsignal output
8 Brown Negative for critical or major alarmsignal output
Technical SpecificationsTable 7-20 lists the technical specifications of the alarm input/output cable.
Table 7-20 Technical specifications of the alarm input/output cable
Item Specification
Connector X1 Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8-Pin, Crystal Plug
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e UTP, 0.51 mm, 24AWG, 8 Cores,PANTONE 430U
7.9 AC Power Monitoring and Alarm-reporting CableThe AC power monitoring and alarm-reporting cable is used to connect the alarm monitoringinterface on the external AC power supply module EPS30-4815AFor extended chassis and theAC power monitoring interface on the SCC board.
StructureFigure 7-21 shows the structure of the AC power monitoring and alarm-reporting cable.
Figure 7-21 Structure of the monitoring and alarm-reporting cable
View A View B8
1
BA8
1
X1 X2Wire
Main LabelLabel 1 Label 2
X1: connecting the alarm interface on theEPS30-4815AF/extended chassis
X2: connecting the alarm interface on the systemcontrol board
Label 1: RS232/RS485 Label 2: TODX
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
Pin AssignmentTable 7-21 lists the pin assignment of the monitoring and alarm-reporting cable.
Table 7-21 Pin assignment of the monitoring and alarm-reporting cable
Cable Connector Pin Color Relationship
W X1.2 X2.7 White/Orange Twisted-pair
X1.1 X2.8 Orange
X1.4 X2.6 White/Blue Twisted-pair
X1.5 X2.3 Blue
X1.8 X2.5 White/Brown Twisted-pair
X1.7 X2.4 Brown
Note: The excessive wires should be cut.
Technical Specifications
Item Technical Specifications
Monitoring andalarm-reportingcable
Monitor & Alarm Cable, Straight Through Cable, 0.75 m, MP8-I,CC4P0.5GY, MP8-I
Connectors X1and X2
Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8-Pin, Crystal Plug
Cable material Twisted-Pair Cable, 100-ohm, Category 5e UTP, 0.51 mm, 24AWG, 8-Cores, PANTONE 430U
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description 7 Fibers and Cables
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
A Safety Labels
The equipment has various safety labels. This section describes the suggestions and locationsof these safety labels.
Label DescriptionThere are labels on the chassis and boards. See Table A-1.
Table A-1 Label description
Figure Type Description
ESD protection label The label suggests the electrostatic-sensitive equipment.
Chassis grounding label The label indicates the position of thegrounding terminal. When the equipmentis installed in a 19-inch cabinet, it isrecommended that you use the groundingterminal specified in this label.
Chassis grounding label The label indicates the position of thegeneral grounding terminal. When theequipment is installed in a cabinet ratherthan a 19-inch cabinet, it is recommendedthat you use the grounding terminalspecified in this label.
Fan warning label The label suggests that do not touch the fanleaves when the fan is rotating.
!
Operation warning label The label indicates the precaution thatshould be taken for operations on the PIUboard. For details, see Label
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description A Safety Labels
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
Figure Type Description
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
华为技术有限公司 中国制造MADE IN CHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
HUAWEI
Qualification label The equipment is qualified.
OptiX PTN 960 电源额定值 POWER RATING: -48--60V;8A
华为技术有限公司 中国制造
HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
1类激光产品Class 1 Laser ProductN14036
この装置は、クラスA情報技術装置です。この装置を家庭環境で使用すゐと電波妨害を引き起こすことがぁります。この場合には使用者が適切な対策
を講ずゐよぅ要求されゐことがぁります。 VCCI-A
Product nameplate label The label suggests the product name andcertification.
OptiX PTN 960 电源额定值 POWER RATING: ~ 100 -240 V; 50/60 HZ; 4 A
华为技术有限公司 中国制造
HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
1类激光产品Class 1 Laser ProductN14036
この装置は、クラスA情報技術装置です。この装置を家庭環境で使用すゐと電波妨害を引き起こすことがぁります。この場合には使用者が適切な対策
を講ずゐよぅ要求されゐことがぁります。 VCCI-A
Product nameplate labelfor an extended chassis
The label suggests the product name andcertification.
Label PositionFigure A-1 shows positions of labels on the chassis.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description A Safety Labels
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
Figure A-1 Label position
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
华为技术有限公司 中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
HUAWEI
!
华为技术有限公司 中国制造
HUAWEI TECHNO LG IES CO .,LTD . MADE IN CHINA
OptiX PTN 960 POWER RATING: -48--60V;8A电源额定值
1类激光产品Class 1 Laser ProductN14036
この装置は、クラスA情報技術装置です。この装置を家庭環境で使用すゐと電波妨害を引き起こすことがぁります。この場合には使用者が適切な対策
を講ずゐよぅ要求されゐことがぁります 。 VCCI -A
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description A Safety Labels
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
B Indicators
This topic describes the names of various indicators and their indications.
Index of Indicators
For boards and their indicators, see Boards and Their Indicators.
For board status indicators, see:
l Description of the Board Status Indicator (STAT)
l Description of the Program Running Indicator (PROG)
l Description of the Synchronization Status Indicator (SYNC)
l Description of the Service Status Indicator (SRV)
l Description of the CXPA/CXPB Switching Status Indicator (ACTX)
l Description of the CXPA/CXPB Control Status Indicator (ACTC)
l Description of the Power Supply Status Indicator (PWR)
l Description of the Fan Status Indicator (FAN)
For service port status indicators, see:
l Description of the Service Port Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicator (ACT)
l Description of the Port Status Indicators of the Ethernet Electrical Ports (LINK)
l Description of the Port Connection and Data Transmitting/Receiving StatusIndicators of the Ethernet Optical Ports (L/A)
l Description of the AQ1/SQ1 Port Status Indicator (LOS1 to LOS4), CQ1B Port StatusIndicator (LOS1 to LOS4)
For system alarm indicators, see:
l Description of the Critical Alarm Indicator (CRIT)
l Description of the Major Alarm Indicator (MAJ)
l Description of the Minor Alarm Indicator (MIN)
For combination of indicators in different start statuses on the system control board, seeDescription of the Start Status Indicator Combination on the System Control Board.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description B Indicators
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
Boards and Their Indicators
Board Indicator
CXPA STAT, PROG, SYNC, ACTX, ACTC
CXPB STAT, PROG, SYNC, ACTX, ACTC
EX1 STAT, SRV, L/A
CQ1B STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3, LOS4
AQ1 STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3, LOS4
SQ1 STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3, LOS4
EM4F STAT, SRV, L/A1 to L/A4
EM4T STAT, SRV, LINK, ACT
EM8F STAT, SRV, L/A1 to L/A8
EM8T STAT, SRV, LINK, ACT
PIU PWR
FAN CRIT, MAJ, MIN, FAN
Description of the Board Status Indicator (STAT)
Status Indication
On (green) The board is working normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Blinking (red) The board needs to be removed.
On (orange) The interface board is not loaded with the logic.
Off l No power is input.l The board is not running.
Description of the Program Running Indicator (PROG)
Status Indication
On (green) l The board software is being initialized.l The board software is normally initialized, and the board
software is running normally.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description B Indicators
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
Status Indication
On (red) l The memory self-check fails.l The board software or the logic file is lost.l Loading of the board software fails.
On for 100 ms and off for100 ms alternately (green)
Loading of the board software is in progress.
On for 300 ms and off for300 ms alternately (green)
The BIOS is guiding the upper-layer software.
On for 100 ms and off for100 ms alternately (red)
The BIOS self-check fails.
Off No power is input.
Description of the Synchronization Status Indicator (SYNC)
Status Indication
On (green) l The clock works in free-run mode and the system clockpriority list is not set. By default, the system clock prioritylist contains only internal sources.
l The clock works in locked mode and is tracing a clock sourceother than the internal sources in the priority list.
l The system clock is working in time synchronization mode,and the PTP time and system clock are in the tracing state.
On (red) l The system clock priority list is set. All the clock sources,however, are lost except for the internal clock sources. Theclock works in holdover mode or free-run mode.
l The system clock is working in time synchronization mode,but no synchronization source is available. The system clockand PTP time are working in holdover or free-run mode.
Description of the Service Status Indicator (SRV)
Status Indication
On (green) Services are running normally and no service-related alarmoccurs (including the situation where the board is activated butnot configured with services).
On (red) A critical or major service-related alarm occurs.
On (orange) A minor or remote service-related alarm occurs.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description B Indicators
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
Status Indication
Off l No power is input.l The board is not running.
Status Indication
On (green) No service-affecting alarm is generated.
On (red) A critical or major service-affecting alarm is generated.
On (orange) A minor service-affecting alarm is generated.
Off l No power is input.l The board is not running.
Description of the CXPA/CXPB Switching Status Indicator (ACTX)
Status Indication
On (green) The board is in the working switching state.
Off The board is in the protection switching state.
Description of the CXPA/CXPB Control Status Indicator (ACTC)
Status Indication
On (green) The board is in the working control state.
On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms alternately(green)
The data in the database of the equipment isbacked up in batch.
Off The board is in the protection control state.
Description of the Power Supply Status Indicator (PWR)
Status Indication
On (green) Power is accessed.
Off l No power is accessed.l The power supply poles are inversely connected.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description B Indicators
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
Description of the Fan Status Indicator (FAN)
Status Indication
On (green) The fans are working normally.
On (red) The fans are working abnormally.
Off The fans are not powered.
Description of the Service Port Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicator (ACT)
Status Indication
Blinking (orange) The data interface is transmitting or receiving data.
Off The data interface is not transmitting or receiving data.
Description of the Port Status Indicators of the Ethernet Electrical Ports (LINK)
Status Indication
On (green) The physical port connection is normal.
Off The physical port connection fails.
Description of the Port Connection and Data Transmitting/Receiving StatusIndicators of the Ethernet Optical Ports (L/A)
Status Indication
On (green) The connection on the physical port isnormal.
Blinking (orange) The connection on the physical port isnormal, and data is received or transmitted onthe port.
Off The physical connection fails.
Description of the AQ1/SQ1 Port Status Indicator (LOS1 to LOS4), CQ1B PortStatus Indicator (LOS1 to LOS4)
Status Indication
On (green) The signal on the port is normal.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description B Indicators
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
Status Indication
On (red) The signal on the port is lost.
Off The optical module is offline.
Description of the Critical Alarm Indicator (CRIT)
Status Indication
On (red) Critical alarms are generated in the equipment.
Off No critical alarms are generated in the equipment.
Description of the Major Alarm Indicator (MAJ)
Status Indication
On (orange) Major alarms are generated in the equipment.
Off No major alarms are generated in the equipment.
Description of the Minor Alarm Indicator (MIN)
Status Indication
On (yellow) Minor alarms are generated in the equipment.
Off No minor alarms are generated in the equipment.
Description of the Start Status Indicator Combination on the System Control Board
From power on to normal running, the system control board goes through various status. TableB-1 shows the indicator combination corresponding to these statuses.
Table B-1 Start status indicator combination
SN Status Indicator
STAT PROG ACTCACTX
SRV
1 The system controlboard is not poweredon.
Off Off Off Off
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description B Indicators
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
SN Status Indicator
STAT PROG ACTCACTX
SRV
2 The BIOS is beingstarted.
Off Green Off Off
3 The BIOS is started,and guides and loadsthe board software.
Off Blinking(green)
Off Off
4 The upper-layersoftware is beinginitialized.
Off Green Off Off
5 The upper-layersoftwareinitialization iscomplete, but thesystem control boardis not running.
Green Green Off Off
6 The system controlboard is running.
Green Green Off/Green/Blinking(green)a
Always onb
NOTEa: When the system control board is running, the ACTC and ACTX indicators may be off, in green orblinking (green). When services are normal, the indicator is green. For other statuses of the indicator, seeDescription of the CXPA/CXPB Switching Status Indicator (ACTX) and Description of the CXPA/CXPB Control Status Indicator (ACTC).
b: When the system control board is running, the SRV indicator may be in red, orange, or green. Whenservices are normal, the indicator is green. For other statuses of the indicator, see Description of theService Status Indicator (SRV).
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description B Indicators
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
C Mounting Ears
This topic provides the types and specifications of mounting ears that are commonly used toinstall the OptiX PTN 960 in different cabinets.
Table C-1 lists the mounting ears that are commonly used to install the OptiX PTN 960 in acabinet.
Table C-1 Mapping between cabinets and mounting ears
Appearance Mounting Ears Height(mm)
Depth(mm)
Width(mm)
Specifications
Mounting ears forthe 19-inch cabinet(2 U chassis)
86.1 39.0 20.3 For details, seeFigure C-1 andFigure C-2.
Mounting ears forthe 19-inch cabinet(extended chassis)
129.7 255.5 20.3 For details, seeFigure C-3 andFigure C-4.
Mounting ears forthe ETSI cabinet(2 U chassis)When the OptiXPTN 960 is installedin the ETSI cabinet,both mounting earsfor the ETSI cabinetand those for the 19-inch cabinet need tobe used.
88.0 25.5 44.0 For details, seeFigure C-5.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description C Mounting Ears
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
Figure C-1 Specifications of mounting ears for the 19-inch cabinet (2 U chassis, left)
59.5
16.0 16.55
46.1
86.1
17.0
39.0
4- 4.5Countersink 8.5 X 90
2.0
6.4
76.2
5.0
10.3
11.6
R3.4
49.4
20.3
F-M4-1
Figure C-2 Specifications of mounting ears for the 19-inch cabinet (2 U chassis, right)
59.5
16.0 16.55
46.1
86.1
17.0
39.04- 4.5
Countersink 8.5 X 90
2.0
6.4
76.2
5.0
10.3
20.311.6
2-R3.4
R3.4
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description C Mounting Ears
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
Figure C-3 Specifications of mounting ears for the 19-inch cabinet (extended chassis, left)
8.8 4.1
57.128
.6
110.
9
129.
7
31.8
F-M4-1
F 8.2
4-10.3
16.9
4-6.
8
9
20.3
22.5
105.5
244.7
5.8
30.0 56
.959
.5
16.116.0123.6
240.5
12 - 4.5Countersink 8.5X90°
255.5
33.967
.753
.0
20.8
3.5Countersink 7.5X90°
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description C Mounting Ears
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
Figure C-4 Specifications of mounting ears for the 19-inch cabinet (extended chassis, right)
countersink 8.8 4.1
57.1
110.
8 129.
7
31.8
2-M4
F 8.2
4-10.2
20.0
18.6
16.9
4-6.
8
15
9
4620
.3
22.5
105.5
244.7
59.5
56.9
5.8
30.0
33.9 67
.753
.0
16.1
123.6
240.5
255.5
32.1
20.8
12- 4.5
8.5X90
3.5
countersink
7.5X90
2-R2.0
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description C Mounting Ears
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
Figure C-5 Specifications of mounting ears for the ETSI cabinet (2 U chassis)
2 –
10.
3
2 – 6.8
50.0
88.0
35.0
10.0
76.22-S-M6-1-ZC(on the back)6.410.0
25.5
21.5
23.0
21.0
44.0
2.0
For details on how to install mounting ears and subracks, see the OptiX PTN 960 QuickInstallation Guide.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description C Mounting Ears
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
D Board Dimensions
This section describes board dimensions.
Type Board Board Dimensions
System control board l TND3CXPAl TND3CXPB
22.86 mm (H) x 225.75 mm (D) x 193.80mm (W)
Interface board l TND1EX1l TND1EM8Fl TND1EM8Tl TND1EM4Fl TND1EM4Tl TND2AQ1l TND1SQ1l TND1CQ1Bl TND3ML1Al TND3ML1Bl TND2MD1Al TND2MD1B
20.32 mm (H) x 225.75 mm (D) x 193.80mm (W)
Single-slot PIU TND1PIU 41.4 mm (H) x 229.9 mm (D) x 21.0 mm(W)
FAN TND1FAN 86.2 mm (H) x 217.6 mm (D) x 28.5 mm(W)
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description D Board Dimensions
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
E Power Consumption and Weight
This chapter lists the power consumption and weight of each board used for the OptiX PTN960.
Table E-1 lists the power consumption and weight of boards.
Table E-1 Power consumption and weight
Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)
CXPA 0.68 27.3
CXPB 0.68 27.3
TND1EX1 0.48 13.1
TND1CQ1B 0.53 10.5
TND2AQ1 0.58 23.00
TND1SQ1 0.47 11.50
TND1EM4F 0.49 12.0
TND1EM4T 0.44 10.4
TND1EM8F 0.56 18.9
TND1EM8T 0.46 21.1
TND3ML1A/TND3ML1B
0.62 9.5
TND2MD1A/TND2MD1B
0.62 12.1
PIU 0.12 0.5
FAN 0.30 l Low rate: 4.1l Medium rate: 13.6l High rate: 29.6
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description E Power Consumption and Weight
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
F Board Configuration Parameters
You can use the U2000 to configure each parameter of the interface boards, cross-connect andsystem control board.
Parameters of the Interface Board
The configurable parameters of the interface boards are the Ethernet interface, PDH interface,SDH interface, path configuration, automatic laser shutdown (ALS), and spare timeslot recoveryvalue.
l The attributes of an Ethernet interface cover the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer3 attributes, advanced attributes and flow control. To configure an Ethernet interface,configure the physical parameters, link layer parameters, network layer parameters andflow control schemes.
l The attributes of a PDH interface cover the general attributes, Layer 3 attributes andadvanced attributes. To configure an E1 interface, configure the physical parameters,network layer parameters, signal frame format, clock mode and loopback scheme.
l The attributes of an SDH interface cover the general attributes and advanced attributes. Toconfigure an SDH interface, configure the physical parameters, link layer parameters andnetwork layer parameters.
l The attributes of the path configuration cover the VC12 frame format and frame mode ofa channelized SDH interface.
l The J0 byte is continually transmitted to carry section access point identifiers, accordingto which the receive end verifies the constant connection to the intended transmit end. It isrecommended to set the J0 byte to "0".
l The J1 byte is the path tracing byte. The transmit end successively transmits the higherorder access point identifiers, according to which the receive end verifies the constantconnection to the intended transmit end. When detecting mismatch of the J1 bytes, thereceive end inserts the HP_TIM alarm in the corresponding path.
l The J2 byte is a VC-12 path tracing byte. The transmit end successively transmits the lowerorder access point identifiers based on the negotiation of the two ends. According to theseaccess point identifiers, the receive end verifies the constant connection to the intendedtransmit end in this path.
l The C2 byte is the signal label byte, which indicates the multiplexing structure of the VCframes and the payload property. The received C2 should be consistent with the transmitted
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description F Board Configuration Parameters
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
C2. If the C2 bytes are mismatched, the local end inserts the HP_SLM alarm in thecorresponding VC-4 path.Table F-1 lists the mapping relation between the service type and setting of the C2.
Table F-1 Mapping relation between the service type and C2 byte
Input Service Type C2 Byte (in Hex)
TUG structure 02
Unequipped 00
l To configure the ALS is to set the parameters of the optical interface.l To ensure the valid utilization of the path, the spare timeslots are eliminated when the
signals are encapsulated into the network. In this way, the TDM frame is partially stuffed.To recover the TDM frame at the service sink, the spare timeslots eliminated duringencapsulation are added again.
Parameters of the Cross-Connect and System Control BoardThe configurable parameters of the cross-connect and system control board board are theenvironment monitor interface, the external time interface and the phase-locked source outputby external clock.
You can set the relay control mode and enable or disable the major alarm relay and critical alarmrelay to configure the environment monitor interface.
You can set the basic Attribute, BMC, and Cable Transmitting Distance to configure the externaltime interface.
You can set the output mode, output timeslot, output threshold, failure condition and failureaction of the 2M phase-locked source external clock
For details, see OptiX PTN 960 Configuration Guide and the U2000 Online Help.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description F Board Configuration Parameters
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
G Glossary
Numerics
1+1 hot backup A backup mode in which two systems with the same functions are deployed, one in theactive state and the other in the standby state with power on. The standby system backsup the data of the active system automatically. Once the active system encounters a fault,the standby system takes over the service of the active system automatically or by manualintervention.
1000BASE-T Twisted cable with the transmission speed as 1000 Mbit/s and the transmission distanceas 100 m.
100BASE-TX IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area networkover two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair(STP) wire.
10BASE-TX IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 10 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area networkover two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair(STP) wire.
A
AAL See ATM Adaptation Layer
ABR See available bit rate
AC See attachment circuit
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have accessto a resource.
ACL See access control list
active link In the link aggregation group, the links connected to active interfaces are active links.
active/standbyswitchover
A troubleshooting technology. When an active device becomes faulty, services andcontrol functions are automatically switched over to the standby device to ensure thenormal running of the services and functions.
address pool A set of IP addresses assigned by Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) or anorganization tied to IANA.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
Address ResolutionProtocol
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses toMAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses throughARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the hostconverts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipmentthrough its IP address.
administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layerand the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher orderVC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative tothe multiplex section frame start.
Administrator A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCoreproduct. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.
ADSL See asymmetric digital subscriber line
advanced ACL An advanced ACL can define ACL rules based on the source addresses, target addresses,protocol type, such as TCP source or target port, the type of the ICMP protocol, andmessage codes.
AF See assured forwarding
aggregated link Multiple signaling link sets between two nodes.
aggregation A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete orconceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.
AIS See alarm indication signal
alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the NetworkManagement System (NMS) . Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view thedetails of the alarm.
alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.
alarm cause A single disturbance or fault may lead to the detection of multiple defects. A fault causeis the result of a correlation process which is intended to identify the defect that isrepresentative of the disturbance or fault that is causing the problem.
alarm clearance An operation performed on an alarm. Through this operation, the status of an alarm ischanged from uncleared to cleared, which indicates that the fault causing the alarm hasbeen rectified.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failurehas been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
alarm inversion For the port that has already been configured but has no service, this function can beused to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference.The alarm report condition of the NE port is related to the alarm inverse mode (notinverse, automatic recovery and manual recovery) setting of the NE and the alarminversion status (Enable and Disable) setting of the port. When the alarm inversion modeof NE is set to no inversion, alarms of the port will be reported as usual no matter whateverthe inversion status of the port is. When the alarm inversion mode of the NE is set toautomatic recovery, and the alarm inversion state of the port is set to Enabled, then thealarm of the port will be suppressed. The alarm inversion status of the port willautomatically recover to "not inverse" after the alarm ends. For the port that has alreadybeen configured but not actually loaded with services, this function can be used to avoidgenerating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. When thealarm inverse mode of the NE is set as "not automatic recovery", if the alarm inversionstatus of the port is set as Enable, the alarm of the port will be reported.
alarm mask On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions forthe system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meetingthe conditions.
alarm name Alarm name is a brief description of the symptom of the failure related to this alarm.
Alarm notification When an error occurs, the performance measurement system sends performance alarmsto the destination (for example, a file and/or fault management system) designated byusers.
alarm parameter Alarm parameters describe the location where the fault has occurred. For example, foran alarm on a board, the parameters include the shelf ID, slot ID and port ID.
alarm severity The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-Trecommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major,Minor, Warning.
alarm status The devices in the network report traps to the Network Management System (NMS),which displays the alarm statuses in the topological view. The status of an alarm can becritical, major, minor and prompt.
alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be thenetworkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific functionmodule of a specific board.
ALS See automatic laser shutdown
APS See automatic protection switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol
AS See Autonomous System
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic thatexceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward thetraffic instead of discarding the packets.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
asymmetric digitalsubscriber line
A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phonelines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL providescontinuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses mostof the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receiveinformation from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice)information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from512 Kbps to about 6 Mbps.
asynchronization Asynchronization does not use the exact data signals timed by the clock. The signalshave different frequencies and phases. The asynchronization usually encapsulates thebits into the control flag, which specifies the beginning and end of the bits.
AsynchronousTransfer Mode
A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous inthe sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM AdaptationLayer
An interface between higher-layer protocols and the Asynchronous Transfer Mode(ATM). The AAL provides a conversion function to and from ATM for various types ofinformation, including voice, video, and data.
ATM PVC ATM permanent virtual circuit
attachment circuit The physical or virtual circuit attaching a CE to a PE.
attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.
AU See administrative unit
auto-negotiation An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices toautomatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities.
automatic lasershutdown
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmittersand optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic protectionswitching
Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switchto a standby facility to recover the traffic.
Autonomous System A network set that uses the same routing policy and is managed by the same technologyadministration department. Each AS has a unique identifier that is an integer rangingfrom 1 to 65535. The identifier is assigned by IANA. An AS can be divided into areas.
available bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possibleforwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-timequality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
B
B-ISDN See Broadband Integrated Services Digital Networks
backward Pertaining to signals or operations propagating in the opposite direction relative to thecall set-up.
backward defectindication
When detecting a defect, the sink node of a LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworkswith the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It providesthe following functions: radio resource management, base station management, powercontrol, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages oneor more BTSs in an actual network.
base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of trafficand signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radioequipment, and the antenna.
Basic ACL A basic ACL can define ACL rules based on only source addresses.
basic input/outputsystem
A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output controlprograms, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system settinginformation. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
bayonet-neill-concelman
A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.
BC See boundary clock
BDI See backward defect indication
BE See best effort
BER See bit error rate
best effort A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwardedfollowing the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of thenetwork and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the timeit reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet lossratio, and high reliability.
BFD See bidirectional forwarding detection
BGP See Border Gateway Protocol
bidirectionalforwarding detection
A simple Hello protocol, similar to the adjacent detection in the route protocol. Twosystems periodically send BFD detection messages on the channel between the twosystems. If one system does not receive the detection message from the other system fora long time, you can infer that the channel is faulty. Under some conditions, the TX andRX rates between systems need to be negotiated to reduce traffic load.
BIOS See basic input/output system
BIP See bit-interleaved parity
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the correspondingbit in the received digital signal.
bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure thecommunications quality of a network.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
bit-interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by thetransmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that thefirst bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in thecovered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit ofall X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by settingthe BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of thesignal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position withinthe X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includesthe BIP-X.
BITS See building integrated timing supply
BMC best master clock
BNC See bayonet-neill-concelman
Border GatewayProtocol
An interautonomous system routing protocol. An autonomous system is a network orgroup of networks under a common administration and with common routing policies.BGP is used to exchange routing information for the Internet and is the protocol usedbetween Internet service providers (ISP).
boundary clock A clock with a clock port for each of two or more distinct PTP communication paths.
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit
bridge protocol dataunit
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN thatuses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information onports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it wasintended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in anetwork topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridgesinterfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
Broadband IntegratedServices DigitalNetworks
A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as voice.It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based circuits at155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed.
broadband TV Broadband TV involves accessing multimedia content via a broadband connection andviewing it on a normal TV.
broadcast address In computer networking, a broadcast address is a network address that allows informationto be sent to all nodes on a network, rather than to a specific network host.
broadcast domain A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any devicewithin the group. Broadcasts do not pass through a router, which bound the domains. Inaddition, the set of ports between which a device forwards a multicast, broadcast, orunknown destination frame.
BSC See base station controller
BTS See base transceiver station
BTV See broadband TV
building integratedtiming supply
In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can usea device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect thesynchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals tothe building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
bus A path or channel for signal transmission. The typical case is that, the bus is an electricalconnection that connects one or more conductors. All devices that are connected to abus, can receive all transmission contents simultaneously.
C
cable distribution plate A component which is used to arrange the cables in order.
cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.
CAR See committed access rate
carrier sense multipleaccess/ collisiondetection
A network access method in which devices that are ready to transmit data first check thechannel for a carrier. If no carrier is sensed, a device can transmit. If two devices transmitat once, a collision occurs and each computer backs off and waits a random amount oftime before attempting to retransmit. This is the access method used by Ethernet.
CBR See constant bit rate
CBS See committed burst size
CC See connectivity check
CCF See connection control function
CCM See continuity check message
CDR clock and data recovery
CDV cell delay variation
CDVT See cell delay variation tolerance
CE See customer edge
cell delay variationtolerance
This parameter measures the tolerance level a network interface has to aggressivesending (back-to-back or very closely spaced cells) by a connected device, and does notapply to end-systems.
cell loss priority Field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being dropped ifthe network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured traffic, which is unlikelyto be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort traffic, which might be dropped.
CEP circuit emulation over packet
CES See circuit emulation service
CF See compact flash
CFM See connectivity fault management
chain network One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series.
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between twoor more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmittedper second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits persecond.
CID See connection identifier
CIR See committed information rate
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
circuit emulationservice
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At thetransmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATMcells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, theinterface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CEStechnology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the originalsequence at the reception end.
CIST See common and internal spanning tree
CLNP connectionless network protocol
clock synchronizationcompliant withprecision time protocol
A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and controlsystem. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.
clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in anetwork.
CLP See cell loss priority
coarse wavelengthdivision multiplexing
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels intothe same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDMdoes not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
colored packet A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.
committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classifiedinto QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission ratecan be defined.
committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committedinformation rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that thisparameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might beforwarded.
committed informationrate
The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normalconditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred tothe leaky bucket.
common and internalspanning tree
The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logicalcontinuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTPto ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
common spanning tree A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST regionis considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be regarded as their spanning treegenerated with STP/RSTP.
compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used inportable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory ina standardized enclosure.
congestion An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network serviceefficiency.
congestionmanagement
A flow control measure to solve the problem of network resource competition. Whenthe network congestion occurs, it places the packet into the queue for buffer anddetermines the order of forwarding the packet.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
connection control The set of functions used for setting up, maintaining and releasing a communication pathbetween two or more users or a user and a network entity, e.g. a dual tone multi-frequencyreceiver.
connection controlfunction
A functional entity in the distributed functional plane of the intelligent network (IN)conceptual model, which provides the basic call services of the bearer (telecom) networkand the advanced switch-based services with the call processing and controllingfunctions.
connection identifier The MAC layer defined in the IEEE802.16 protocol is based on connection. Eachconnection is uniquely identified with a CID.
connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved byeach MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.
connectivity faultmanagement
Ethernet connectivity fault management (CFM) is an end-to-end per-service-instanceEthernet layer operation, administration, and management (OAM) protocol. It includesproactive connectivity monitoring, fault verification, and fault isolation for largeEthernet metropolitan-area networks (MANs) and WANs.
constant bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based onthe constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on preciseclocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
constraint shortest pathfirst
An extension of shortest path algorithms like OSPF and IS-IS. The path computed usingCSPF is a shortest path fulfilling set of constrains. It simply means that it runs shortestpath algorithm after pruning those links that violate a given set of constraints. Aconstraint could be minimum bandwidth required per link (also know as bandwidthguaranteed constraint), end-to-end delay, maximum number of link traversed etc. CSPFis widely used in MPLS Traffic Engineering. The routing using CSPF is known asConstraint Based Routing (CBR).
constraint-basedrouted label switchedpath
An Label Switched Path set up based on certain constraints is called Constraint-basedRouted Label Switched Path (CR-LSP).
continuity checkmessage
CCM is used to detect the link status.
control plane The control plane performs the call control and connection control functions. Throughsignaling, the control plane sets up and releases connections, and may restore aconnection in case of a failure. The control plane also performs other functions in supportof call and connection control, such as routing information dissemination.
control word A 4-byte encapsulated packet header. It is used to transmit packets in a MPLS packetswitching network.
convergence layer The convergence layer is a "bridge" between the access layer and the core layer. Itprovides the convergence and forwarding functions for the access layer. It processes allthe traffic from the access layer devices, and provides the uplinks to the core layer.Compared with the access layer, the convergence layer devices should have higherperformances, fewer interfaces and higher switching rate. In the real network, theconvergence layer refers to the network between UPEs and PE-AGGs.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
core layer The core layer functions as the backbone of high speed switching for networks, and itprovides high speed forwarding communications. It has a backbone transmissionstructure that provides high reliability, high throughput, and low delay. The core layerdevices must have a good redundancy, error tolerance, manageability, adaptability, andthey support dual-system hot backup or load balancing technologies. In a real network,the core layer includes the IP/MPLS backbone network consisting of NPEs and backbonerouters.
CPE See customer premises equipment
CPN customer premises network
CR-LSP See constraint-based routed label switched path
CRC See cyclic redundancy check
crossover cable A twisted pair patch cable wired in such a way as to route the transmit signals from onepiece of equipment to the receive signals of another piece of equipment, and vice versa.
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access/ collision detection
CSPF See constraint shortest path first
CST See common spanning tree
CTD cell transfer delay
current alarm An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled.
current performancedata
Performance data stored currently in a register. An NE provides two types of registers,namely, 15-minute register and 24-hour register, to store performance parameters of aperformance monitoring entity. The two types of registers stores performance data onlyin the specified monitoring period.
customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to theService Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
customer premisesequipment
Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) is equipment located at an end-user's premises.Most CPEs are telephones or other service equipment. A CPE can be a Mobile Station(MS) or a Subscriber Station (SS). An MS is mobile equipment, and an SS is fixedequipment.
CV connectivity verification
CW See control word
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing
cyclic redundancycheck
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking usesa complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sendingdevice performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that itsends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation aftertransmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmissionwas error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmissionincludes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
D
data communicationnetwork
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the DataCommunication Function (DCF).
data communicationschannel
The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal totransmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
data connectionequipment
Data connection equipment including analog, DSL, ISDN, cable modem circuits.
data link layer Layer 2 in the open system interconnection (OSI) architecture; the layer that providesservices to transfer data over the transmission link between open systems.
data terminalequipment
A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the DCEequipment (for example, model) and usually uses the clock signals produced by DCE.
Datagram A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram,UDP datagram.
DC See direct current
DCC See data communications channel
DCE See data connection equipment
DCN See data communication network
DDF See digital distribution frame
DDN See digital data network
DE See discard eligible
DEI See drop eligible indicator
delay variation A component of cell transfer delay, which is induced by buffering.
dense wavelengthdivision multiplexing
Technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation ofsingle mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacingas carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.
desired Min Tx interval The minimum interval that the local system would like to use when transmitting BFDcontrol packets.
Detection multiplier The desired detect time multiplier for BFD control packets. It determines the sessiondetection time together with the DMTI and RMRI.
DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DHCP Relay Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol relay (DHCP relay) is a function that enablesforwarding of DHCP data between the device that requests the IP address and the DHCPserver.
DHCP Server A program that allocates the IP addresses of the local address pool to the users at theuser side and allocates the IP addresses of the relay address pool to the users that passthrough the DHCP proxy at the network side.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
differentiated services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a seriesof functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioningfunctions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.
DiffServ See differentiated services
digital data network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiberchannel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplextechnology.
digital distributionframe
A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange withtransmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital subscriber line A technology for providing digital connections over the copper wire or the localtelephone network. DSL performs data communication over the POTS lines withoutaffecting the POTS service.
digital subscriber lineaccess multiplexer
A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company thatreceives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections andputs the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques.
direct current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop orchange amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
discard eligible A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supportsthe FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet trafficexceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In thecase of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.
Discrete service The cross-connection that exists on an NE but cannot form trails on the networkmanagement system.
dispersion The dependence of refraction on the wavelength of light. Different wavelengths aretransmitted in an optical medium at different speeds. Wavelengths reach the end of themedium at different times. As a result, the light pulse spreads and the dispersion occurs.
DLL See data link layer
DMTI See desired Min Tx interval
DNI See dual node interconnection
DNS See domain name service
domain name service A hierarchical naming system for computers, services, or any resource connected to theInternet or a private network. It associates various information with domain namesassigned to each of the participants. The Domain Name System distributes theresponsibility of assigning domain names and mapping those names to IP addresses bydesignating authoritative name servers for each domain.
DRDB dynamic random database
drop eligible indicator DEI indicates the eight transmission precedence in the PRI field can be combined withdrop precedence.
DS See dynamic service
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in adomain that is not DS-capable.
DS domain In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group ofnetwork nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It providespoint-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.
DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSL See digital subscriber line
DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer
DTE See data terminal equipment
dual homing A network topology in which a device is connected to the network at two independentaccess points. One point is the primary connection and the other a standby connectionthat is activated in the event of a failure of the primary connection.
dual nodeinterconnection
DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point, between the rings, in caseof an interconnection failure scenario.
dual-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protectedentity (e.g. "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure.
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing
Dynamic HostConfiguration Protocol
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol.A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client hostrequesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internetnetwork. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.
dynamic service A term used in IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers) 802.16 networksto describe a set of messages and protocols that allow a base station and subscriber stationto add, modify, or delete the characteristics of s service flow.
E
E-LAN See Ethernet LAN
E-Tree See Ethernet-tree
E1 A European standard for high-speed data transmission at 2.048 Mbit/s. It provides 32 x64 kbit/s channels.
EBS See excess burst size
ECC See embedded control channel
Edge LSR The basic unit of the MPLS network is LSR. The network composed by LSR is namedMPLS domain. LSR is located at the edge of the MPLS domain. LSR used to connectother user network is named Label Edge Router (LER). The LSR in the core of theinternal area is the core LSR. The core LSR can be the router that supports MPLS andbe the ATM-LSR generated after the ATM switch is ungraded. LSRs in the domaincommunicated by MPLS.
EF See expedited forwarding
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
EFM See Ethernet in the first mile
EGP See Exterior Gateway Protocol
Egress The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group islabeled. The egress LER is named Egress.
electromagneticcompatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunicationsequipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagneticenvironment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentionalelectromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagneticinterference
Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades orlimits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electromagneticshielding
The process of limiting the coupling of an electromagnetic field between two locations.Typically, it is applied to enclosures, separating electrical circuits from externalsurroundings, and to cables, separating internal wires from the surroundings that thecable passes through.
electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at differentelectrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
embedded controlchannel
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)information between NEs.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI See electromagnetic interference
EMS See electromagnetic shielding
Engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
EPL See Ethernet private line
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service
error tolerance The ability of a system or component to continue normal operation despite the presenceof erroneous inputs.
errored frame second A one-second interval during which at least one errored frame is detected.
ESD See electrostatic discharge
ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf orcabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
ETH-LT Ethernet link trace
Ethernet in the firstmile
Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes theadvantages of the SHDSL.b is technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFMprovides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. Inaddition, it meets the users' requirements on high definition television system (HDTV)and Video On Demand (VOD).
Ethernet LAN A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernetvirtual connection).
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
Ethernet private LANservice
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over adedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, orMPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-pointconnections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet virtualprivate LAN
A service that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service.
Ethernet virtualprivate LAN service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a sharedbridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.
Ethernet-tree An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet VirtualConnection.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EuropeanTelecommunicationsStandards Institute
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
EVPLn See Ethernet virtual private LAN
excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, thetraffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameterused to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet sizewhen the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parametermust be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than themaximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. Theprotection switching is not really performed.
EXP See experimental bits
expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services thatdemand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EFtraffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCPvalue of EF PHB is "101110".
experimental bits A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to identifythe CoS of the MPLS packet.
Extended ID The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different networksegments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE.
Exterior GatewayProtocol
A protocol for exchanging routing information between two neighbor gateway hosts(each with its own router) in a network of autonomous systems.
extra traffic The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not used forthe protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
F
fair queue A mechanism for queue scheduling in which network resource is allocated equally anddelay and jitter time of all traffic are optimized.
fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 timesfaster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and soon. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the followingthree types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core opticalfibers).
fast reroute A technology to locally protect MPLS TE network. Only the interface with the speed of100 Mbps can support FRR. If the switching speed of FRR can reach 50ms, the packetloss decreases when some faults occur on the network. FRR is applicable to services thatare very sensitive to packet loss and delay. When a fault is detected at the lower layer,the lower layer informs the upper routing system of the fault. Then the routing systemforwards packets through a backup link. In this manner, the impact of the link fault onservices is minimized. FRR is local and temporary. Once the protected LSP recovers ora new LSP is set up, traffic is switched to the original or the new LSP. After you configureFRR on LSP and some link or some node on LSP is invalid, traffic is switched to theprotected link and a new LSP is trying to be set up on the LSP ingress.
FDI See forward defect indication
FE See fast Ethernet
FEC See forwarding equivalence class
FF See fixed filter style
FFD fast failure detection
FFD packet FFD is a path failure detection method independent from CV. Different from a CVpacket, the frequency for generating FFD packets is configurable to satisfy differentservice requirements. An FFD packet contains information the same as that in a CVpacket. The destination end LSR processes FFD packets in the same way for processingCV packets.
FIB See forward information base
fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and forconnections between subracks or inside a subrack.
field programmablegate array
A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as thePAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but alsoovercomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of thelimited number of gate arrays.
FIFO See first in first out queuing
File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computerson the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be anFTP client and the other an FTP server.
filler panel A piece of board to cover vacant slots, to keep the frame away from dirt, to keep properairflow inside the frame, and to beautify the frame appearance.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
first in first out queuing A queuing policy that features that the packet reaching earlier can be allocated resourcefirstly.
fixed filter style On an MPLS network, an RSVP node creates a distinct reservation for data packets froma particular sender. This sender does not share its resource reservation with other senders.
flash memory A type of special electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) andcan be erased and rewritten in blocks at a time instead of only one byte. The data shoredin flash memory will not be lost if the flash memory is powered off.
flow control A set of mechanisms used to prevent the network from being overloaded by regulatingthe input rate transmissions.
flow queue The same type of services of a user is considered one service flow; HQoS performs queuescheduling according to the services of each user. The service flows of each user areclassified into four FQs, namely, CS, EF, AF, and BE. CS is assigned a traffic shapingpercentage for Priority Queuing (PQ); EF, AF, and BE are assigned weights for WeightedFair Queuing (WFQ). The preceding two scheduling modes occupy a certain bandwidtheach; they can act at the same time without interfering each other.
Forward It is the direction that traffic flows along the detected LSP.
forward defectindication
Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of theLSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of thedefect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affectedhigher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward informationbase
In data communication, a table of information that provides network hardware (bridgesand routers) with the directions needed to forward packets of data to locations on othernetworks. The information contained in a routing table differs according to whether it isused by a bridge or a router. A bridge relies on both the source (originating) anddestination addresses to determine where and how to forward a packet.
forwarding equivalenceclass
As a class-based forwarding technology, MPLS classifies the packets with the sameforwarding mode, and the process is called Forwarding Equivalence Class. Packets withthe same FEC are processed similarly on an MPLS network. It is flexible to divide FECs,and it can be a combination of the source address, the destination address, the sourceport, the destination port, the protocol type, the VPN, and so on.
Forwarding plane Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and canbe used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.
FPGA See field programmable gate array
FPS PW fast protection switching (FPS) achieves dual-homing protection for E-Line services.
FQ See fair queue
FR See frame relay
frame relay A packet-switching protocol for use on WANs (wide area networks). Frame relaytransmits variable-length packets at up to 2 Mbps over predetermined, set paths knownas PVCs (permanent virtual circuits). It is a variant of X.25 but dispenses with some ofX.25's error detection for the sake of speed. See also ATM (definition 1), X.25.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
Free-run mode An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced bythe oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In thismode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost externalreference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previouslyconnected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflectsthe influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminateswhen the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference.
FRR See fast reroute
FTP See File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in bothdirections, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-linetelephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heardat the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road withone lane for each direction.
G
Gateway IP When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be usedto enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is thegateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannotidentify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IPnetworks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of thenetwork and one IP address of the Ethernet port.
gateway networkelement
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer andthe NM application layer
GE See gigabit Ethernet
generic framingprocedure
A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has beenstandardized by ITU-T SG15.
generic routingencapsulation
Applied to the encapsulation of IP datagrams tunneled through the internet, GRE is amechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other network. GREserves as a Layer 3 tunneling protocol, and provides a tunnel for transparentlytransmitting data packets.
GFP See generic framing procedure
gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not supportcoaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. IfGigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causingthe length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global PositioningSystem
A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, andtiming services to worldwide users.
global system formobilecommunications
The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by ETSI (EuropeanTelecommunications Standards Institute).
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
GND Ground
GNE See gateway network element
GPS See Global Positioning System
GR See graceful restart
graceful restart In IETF, protocols related to Internet Protocol/Multiprotocol Label Switching (IP/MPLS) such as Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Intermediate System-IntermediateSystem (IS-IS), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Label Distribution Protocol (LDP),and Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) are extended to ensure that the forwardingis not interrupted when the system is restarted. This reduces the flapping of the protocolsat the control plane when the system performs the active/standby switchover. This seriesof standards is called graceful restart.
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options withgraphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
GRE See generic routing encapsulation
GSM See global system for mobile communications
GUI See graphical user interface
H
half-duplex A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in bothdirections, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a partybegins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, beforereplying.
Hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interfaceto the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.
HDSL high-speed digital subscriber line
hello packet It is the commonest packet which is periodically sent by a router to its neighbors. Itcontains DR, Backup Designated Router (BDR), the known neighbors and the values oftimers.
High Speed DownlinkPacket Access
A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirementfor asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables themaximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing theWCDMA network topology.
higher order path In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lowerorder path layers.
History PerformanceData
The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reportedand stored in the NMS.
Hold priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicatesthe highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by thetunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.
hot plugging A technology used to improve the reliability and maintainability of a system. It ensuresthat the system performance is not affected when a board is inserted and removed duringsystem running.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables andstorage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. Whenthe faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services inthe faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entiresystem.
HP See higher order path
HSB See hot standby
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access
I
I/O input/output
IANA See Internet assigned numbers authority
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol
IE See information element
IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol managesand controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet GroupManagement Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IGP See Interior Gateway Protocol
IGRP See Interior Gateway Routing Protocol
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM
IMA frame The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical framedefined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N linksin an IMA group.
information element An Information Element is a group of information which may be included within asignaling message or data flow which is sent across an interface. Examples may includeQoS (Quality of Service) definitions, setup parameters, user identifiers etc.
Ingress The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group islabeled. The ingress LER is named Ingress.
Inloop A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connectunit.
Institute of Electricaland ElectronicsEngineers
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States butboasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
integrated servicesdigital network
A network defined in CCITT, providing comprehensive transmission service for thevoice, video, and data. The ISDN enables the voice, video, and data transmission on asmall number of data channels simultaneously, thus implementing a comprehensivetransmission service.
Interior GatewayProtocol
A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in small-sized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the routing informationprotocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP), the enhanced IGRP(EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF).
Interior GatewayRouting Protocol
A routing protocol from Cisco that was developed in 1988 to overcome the shortcomingsof RIP. IGRP takes bandwidth, latency, reliability and current traffic load intoconsideration. It is typically used within an autonomous system, such as an Internetdomain. IGRP was superseded by Enhanced IGRP (EIGRP).
internal spanning tree A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
InternationalElectrotechnicalCommission
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.
InternationalTelecommunicationUnion
A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendationbodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) andradio networks (ITU-R).
Internet assignednumbers authority
The organization operated under the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-spaceallocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA alsomaintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, includingautonomous system numbers.
Internet ControlMessage Protocol
A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction andother information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP softwareon one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See alsocommunications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet EngineeringTask Force
A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged withstudying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the InternetArchitecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groupsthat concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisherof the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet GroupManagement Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups amongthe TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establishand maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sentacross an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet deliveryservice. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. Theentire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the twofundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
Internet protocoltelevision
In the Internet Protocol Television (IPTV) system, video is transmitted in IP packets.Also called "TV over IP", IPTV uses streaming video techniques to deliver scheduledTV programs or video-on-demand (VOD). Unlike transmitting over the air or throughcable to a TV set, IPTV uses the transport protocol of the Internet for delivery and requireseither a computer and software media player or an IPTV set-top box to decode the imagesin realtime.
Internet Protocolversion 4
The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which isassigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and iswritten as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optionalsubnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers togetherare used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within thenetwork or subnetwork.
Internet protocolversion 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specificationsand standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering TaskForce (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designedas the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 addresshas 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet serviceprovider
An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services.
interworking A way to connect telecom devices so that they can communicate with each other.
inverse multiplexingover ATM
The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higherbandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This isreferred to as an IMA group.
IP See Internet Protocol
IP address A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected tothe Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets.An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal valuesof its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of theIP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifythe host itself.
IP Protocol IP protocol refers to a protocol suite consisting of a series of standards that enables adata packet to be transmitted to its destination through the Internet. IP protocol providesa connectionless data packet transmission mechanism, shields physical networktransmission, addresses IP, and selects routes.
IPTV See Internet protocol television
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4
IPv6 See Internet protocol version 6
ISDN See integrated services digital network
ISP See Internet service provider
IST See internal spanning tree
ITU See International Telecommunication Union
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
J
jumper A connection wire for connecting two pins.
L
L2VPN See Layer 2 virtual private network
Label distribution Packets with the same destination address belong to an FEC. A label out of an MPLSlabel resource pool is allocated to the FEC. LSRs record the relationship of the label andthe FEC. Then, LSRs sends a message and advertises to upstream LSRs about the labeland FEC relationship in message. The process is called label distribution.
Label DistributionProtocol
A protocol defined for distributing labels in MPLS network. It is the set of proceduresand messages by which Label Switched Routers (LSRs) establish Label Switched Paths(LSPs) through a network by mapping network-layer routing information directly todata-link layer switched paths. More information about the applicability of LDP can befound in [RFC3037].
label edge router A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to assignlabels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.
Label space Value range of the label allocated to peers.
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through labelswitching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based onnormal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
label switching router Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR iscomposed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible forallocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating andremoving the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groupsreceived in the label forwarding table.
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG See link aggregation group
LAN See local area network
LAN switch It is a piece of equipment used to allocate communication links in a LAN.
Layer 2 Multicast When Ethernet is used as the link layer, Layer 2 multicast uses multicast MAC addressesfor traffic transmission. Therefore, a technology must exist to map the IP multicastaddress to the multicast MAC address.
layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmitsand distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is thesecond layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
Layer 2 virtual privatenetwork
A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packetswitched (IP/MPLS) network.
LB See loopback
LBM See loopback message
LBR See loopback reply
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
LC Lucent connector
LCT local craft terminal
LDP See Label Distribution Protocol
LDP peer Two LSRs that use LDP to exchange labels or FEC mappings. LDP sessions existbetween them.
LER See label edge router
limit rate A traffic management technology used to limit the total rate of packet sending on aphysical interface or a Tunnel interface. LR is directly enabled on the interface to controlthe traffic passing the interface.
line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals themaximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
Link AggregationControl Protocol
A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface toincrease bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE802.3ad.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a linkaggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it werea single link.
Link Control Protocol In the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the Link Control Protocol (LCP) establishes,configures, and tests data-link Internet connections.
Link Group According to some principles, links are divided into the set in the logical term. A set oflinks is called the link group. The division makes management more convenient.
Link Layer DiscoveryProtocol
The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is an L2D protocol defined in IEEE 802.1ab.Using the LLDP, the NMS can rapidly obtain the Layer 2 network topology and changesin topology when the network scales expand.
Link Monitoring Link monitoring is a mechanism for an interface to notify the peer of the fault when theinterface detects that the number of errored frames, errored codes, or errored frameseconds reaches or exceeds the specified threshold.
Link Protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link isa downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,the link protection should be provided.
link stateadvertisement
The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is thecondition of the link.
link state database A database containing the states of all the links.
Link status The running status of a link, which can be Up, Down, backup, or unknown.
linktrace message The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEPis called Linktrace Message(LTM). LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MACaddress of the destination MEP2.
linktrace reply For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to thesource MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message iscalled Linktrace Reply (LTR). LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of theTTL of LTM minus 1.
LLC See logical link control
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
LLDP See Link Layer Discovery Protocol
LLID locate loopback ID
LMP link management protocol
LMSP linear multiplex section protection
load sharing A device running mode. Two or more hardware units can averagely share the systemload according to their processing capabilities when they work normally. When ahardware unit becomes faulty, the other units fulfill the tasks of the faulty unit on theprecondition of guaranteeing the system performance, for example, few call loss.
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few squarekilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANsare generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Lock status Services are not switched to the protection board or channel when a fault occurs, ifcurrently no switching takes place. If currently the switching takes place, after theworking board or channel recovers to normal, the services are not switched back to theworking board or channel.
Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from beingswitched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has beenswitched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel tothe working channel.
LOF See Loss Of Frame
logical link control According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the uppersublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media(such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
LOM loss of multiframe
loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that thesignal or message can be analyzed for errors.
loopback message The loopback packet sent by the node that supports 802.2ag MAC Ping to the destinationnode. LBM message carries its own sending time.
loopback reply For 802.2ag MAC Ping, the destination MEP replies with a response message to thesource MEP after the destination MEP receives the LBM, and the response message iscalled Loopback Reply. The LBR carries the sending time of LBM, the receiving timeof LBM and the sending time of LBR.
LOP See loss of pointer
LOS See Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Frame A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overheadindicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitorthe performance of the PHY layer.
loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in thePHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start ofcell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the receivedsignal.
low priority queuing LPQ is performed after WFQ. It also means the device schedules queues strictly basedon the priority of queues.
Lower subrack The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.
Lower Threshold When the performance event count value is smaller than a certain value, a threshold-crossing event occurs. The value is the lower threshold.
LP lower order path
LPQ See low priority queuing
LPT link-state pass through
LR See limit rate
LSA See link state advertisement
LSDB See link state database
LSP See label switched path
LSP tunnel For an LSP, after a label is assigned to an FEC on the ingress, the label determines thetraffic forwarding. The traffic is transparent to the intermediate nodes. In this sense, anLSP can be regarded as an LSP tunnel.
LSR See label switching router
LSS loss of sequence synchronization
LT linktrace
LTM See linktrace message
LTR See linktrace reply
M
MA See maintenance association
MAC See media access control
MAC address learning Service that characterizes a learning bridge, in which the source MAC address of eachreceived packets is stored so that future packets destined for that address can beforwarded only to the bridge interface on which that address is located. Packets destinedfor unrecognized addresses are forwarded out every bridge interface. This scheme helpsminimize traffic on the attached LANs. MAC address learning is defined in the IEEE802.1 standard.
main distributionframe
A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
mains supply The commercial power supply of a nation. In China, the nominal voltage of the mainssupply is 220 V AC and the frequency is 50 Hz.
maintenanceassociation
That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, theconnectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of MaintenanceEntities.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
maintenanceassociation end point
A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a ServiceInstance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is anend point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate MaintenanceEntity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.
maintenanceassociationintermediate point
A CFM Entity, associated with a specific pair of ISS Service Access Points or EISSService Access Points, which reacts and responds to CFM frames. It is associated witha single Maintenance Association, and is an intermediate point within one or moreMaintenance Entities.
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. Thedevices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
MAN See metropolitan area network
Management right The right enabling a user to manage the specified devices and boards or the group of auser to manage specified domains.
manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition existson other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switchcommand is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
master-slavesynchronization
In the master-slave mode, a designated master clock disseminates its frequency referenceto all other slave clocks.
maximum transmissionunit
The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,depending on the network, 576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes onEthernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining thesize of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmittedacross networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the onethat all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networksinvolved.
MBS maximum burst size
MCF See message communication function
MCR See minimum cell rate
MD See maintenance domain
MD5 See message digest algorithm 5
MDF See main distribution frame
MDP See message dispatch processor
Mean Time BetweenFailures
The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measureof the reliability of the system.
Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of thedata link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connectingthe physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocolchecks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain controlinformation is added to the data, and then the data and the control information aretransmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MACprotocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmittedcorrectly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the controlinformation is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
media gateway A logical entity that converts the format of the media of a network to meet the formatrequirement of another network. It can process audio services, video services and dataservices, and convert the media format in full duplex mode. In addition, it can play certainaudio and video signals, and provide the IVR function and media conference.
MEP See maintenance association end point
merge point The LSR where one or more backup tunnels rejoin the path of the protected LSPdownstream of the potential failure. The same LSR may be both an MP and a PLRsimultaneously.
messagecommunicationfunction
The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of managementinformation with their prs.
message digestalgorithm 5
A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check messageintegrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endianintegers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, whichare then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number.
message dispatchprocessor
The MDP roughly processes the received messages, and then sends the messages to thedestinations.
metropolitan areanetwork
A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computerresources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large localarea network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN).The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single largernetwork (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It isalso used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging themwith backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.
MGW See media gateway
microwave The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum with much longer wavelengths than infraredradiation, typically above about 1 mm.
minimum cell rate Minimum Cell Rate (MCR). Parameter defined by the ATM Forum for ATM trafficmanagement. MCR is defined only for Available Bit Rate (ABR) transmissions, andspecifies the minimum value for the ACR.
MIP See maintenance association intermediate point
mirror It is an action to store a copy of a file to another archive site to release the load of theoriginal site, or to provide an archive site closer to the users geographically.
MLD See multicast listener discovery
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
MLPPP See Multi-link Point to Point Protocol
MP See merge point
MP See maintenance point
MP-BGP See Multi-protocol Extensions for Border Gateway Protocol
MPLS L2VPN The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. Inthis case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs ofdifferent media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.
MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of faultdetection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM andrelevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CR-LSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.
MPLS TE tunnel In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported throughmultiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a groupof LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has twoidentifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquelydefine the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE orFILTER_SPEC object.
MS See multiplex section
MSP See multiplex section protection
MST See multiplex section termination
MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR See Mean Time To Repair
MTU See maximum transmission unit
Multi-link Point toPoint Protocol
A protocol used in ISDN connections. MLPPP lets two B channels act as a single line,doubling connection rates to 128 kbit/s.
Multi-protocolExtensions for BorderGateway Protocol
A multi-protocol extension of BGP-4. MP-BGP supports multiple network layerprotocols and identifies the protocols based on address families. MP-BGP transmits VPNcomposition information and VPN-IPv4 routes between PEs.
Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. Thedestination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP addressranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicastgroup rather than a host.
multicast group A set of members participating in the packet multicast service. The multicast group isdefined by a rule (or set of rules) which identifies a collection of members implicitly orexplicitly. This rule may associate members for the purpose of participating in a call, ormay associate members who do not participate in data transfer but do participate inmanagement, security, control, and accounting for the multicast group.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
multicast listenerdiscovery
The MLD is used by the IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directlyconnected network segments, and set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to whichthe hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and themulticast router can manage members on the local network.
multiple spanning treeinstance
Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTPwithin an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology forframes classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MSTConfiguration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.
Multiple SpanningTree Protocol
Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using analgorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmedas a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoidedin the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs andmultiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwardedin a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiple SpanningTree Region
The MST region consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links amongthem. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MSTregion attributes belong to the same MST region. The attributes for the same MST regionare as follows: Same region name Same revision level Same mapping relation betweenthe VLAN ID to MSTI
multiplex section The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.
multiplex sectionprotection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between andincluding two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a"protection" channel.
multiplex sectiontermination
The function performed to generate the MSOH in the process of forming an SDH framesignal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.
Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higherorder path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplexsection.
Multiservice capability It specifies whether multiple services can be independently processed during a session.
N
NA See network address
NCP See Network Control Protocol
NE database There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following: (1) DRDB: a dynamicdatabase in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery; (2) SDB: a static database in a power-down RAM; (3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM. In efficientoperation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the same time.Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDB toFDB0 and FDB1. When an NE is restarted after power-down, the NE database is restoredin the following procedures: As the SDB data is lost due to power-down, the main controlrestores the data first from DRDB. If the data in DRDB is also lost due to the exhaustionof the battery, the data is restored from FDB0 or FDB1.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
NE ID An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has aunique NE ID.
NE side The NE configuration data saved on the SCC board of the equipment, which can beuploaded to the network management system and then stored in databases on the networkmanagement system NE side.
network address On the Internet, addresses are based on the IP protocol, which uses a 32-bit code in theIP header to identify host addresses.
Network ControlProtocol
This is the program that switches the virtual circuit connections into place, implementspath control, and operates the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) link.
Network diameter The maximum of network bridges that the communication passes through between anytwo terminal devices in the switched network.
Network entity Network entity refers to the universal basic devices used to describe the functions andstructure of the transmission network, which considerably facilitates the description ofthe network. The network entities include transmission object and sub-network.
network layer The network layer is layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. Thenetwork layer provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems areinterconnected. In addition, the network layer provides congestion control and trafficcontrol. In the TCP/IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specifiedand implemented by IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.
Network ManagementSystem
A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.
network segment A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to allnodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.
network service accesspoint
A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer canaccess OSI network services.
network storm A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcastpackets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission qualityand availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by net
Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. Itsynchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client.
network unit layer The logical layer that implements the configuration, failure and performance for a singlenetwork element in the layered management architecture of the telecom networkmanagement system.
NMS See Network Management System
NHOP next-hop
NNI See network node interface
Node Protection A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able toprotect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to thePLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able toprotect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to thePLR.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
NPC network parameter control
NRT non-real-time
NSAP See network service access point
NSF not stop forwarding
NTP See Network Time Protocol
O
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance
OAMPDU oam protocol data unit
ODF See optical distribution frame
OOF See out of frame
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra'salgorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. Alink state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routersin the area.
Open SystemsInterconnection
A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made bydifferent vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven differentcategories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message sourceand destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
operation log The Operations Log is a list of information about operation events.
operation,administration andmaintenance
A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in anoperational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriberaccess network to users/subscribers.
optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couplethe optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. Aconnector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source(or a detector).+
optical distributionframe
A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
optical fiber A thin filament of glass or other transparent material, through which a signal-encodedlight beam may be transmitted using total internal reflection.
OSI See Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF See open shortest path first
out of frame An NE transmits an OOF downstream when it receives framing errors in a specifiednumber of consecutive frame bit positions.
Outloop A method of looping back the input signals received at an port to an output port withoutchanging the structure of the signals.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
overcurrent protection A circuit protection technology. When there is a great volume of traffic on a circuit andthe current is stronger than the protection threshold, the circuit is cut off after the circuitprotector timer expires.
overhead cabling Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
P
P A backbone device that is located in the service provider network. A P device is notdirectly connected with the CE devices. The P devices only need the basic MPLSforwarding capability and do not maintain information about a VPN.
P2P See point to point service
packet loss The discarding of data packets in a network when a device is overloaded and cannotaccept any incoming data at a given moment.
packet over SDH/SONET
A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POSinterface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport ofpacket data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.
Packet rate The number of bits or bytes passed within a specified time. It is expressed in bits/s orbytes/s.
packet switching A network technology in which information is transmitted by means of exchangingpackets and the bandwidth of a channel can be shared by multiple connections.
parity A method for character level error detection. An extra bit added to a string of bits, usuallya 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd or evenparity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the transmittingdevice frames a character, it counts the numbers of 1s in the frame and attaches theappropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity error, may askfor the data to be retransmitted.
pass-through The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any givendirection of transmission.
path layer A layer within an SDH entity that supports the SDH based network transport services,e.g. multiplexing, cross-connection, regeneration. The network element function ismodeled by managed objects.
PBS See peak burst size
PCB See printed circuit board
PCI bus PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bitfor interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.
PCR See peak cell rate
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy
PDU See protocol data unit
PE See provider edge
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burstIP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. Thisparameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be notless than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
peak cell rate The maximum rate at which an ATM connection can accept cells.
peak information rate Peak Information Rate. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should benot less than the committed information rate.
Peer BGP speakers exchanging information with each other.
penultimate hoppopping
Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLSenabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS taggedpacket is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to anadjacent Label Edge Router (LER).
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hopbehaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network shouldselect the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETFdefines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
Performance register Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15-min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min historyperformance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSESregister. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, soevery board functional module has a performance register. A performance register isused to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, soas to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
permanent virtual path Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
PGND protection ground
phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency ofa voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-frequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with theincoming or reference frequency.
PHB See per-hop behavior
PHP See penultimate hop popping
physical layer Physical layer is the Layer 1 in the Open System Interconnection (OSI) architecture; thelayer that provides services to transmit bits or groups of bits over a transmission linkbetween open systems and which entails electrical, mechanical and handshaking
physical link The physical link refers to the link between two physical NEs. When the user createsNEs or refreshes the device status, the system automatically creates the physical linkaccording to the topology structure information on the device. The physical link canmodify the remarks information. It cannot be deleted.
Ping Test A test that is performed to send a data packet to the target IP address (a unique IP addresson the device on the network) to check whether the target host exists according to thedata packet of the same size returned from the target host.
PIR See peak information rate
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
plesiochronous digitalhierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimumrate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
PLL See phase-locked loop
PLR See point of local repair
point of local repair The ingress node of the bypass tunnel. The head-end node of a backup tunnel or a detourtunnel.
point to multipoint A communications network that provides a path from one location to multiple locations(from one to many).
point to point service A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients areterminal users.
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulatesdata packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
policy template To define the calculation rules of a charging event, for example, rating, debiting andaccumulating. A policy template may contain the parameters to be instantiated. Theycan be used when the attributes of the condition judgment, calculation method, and actionfunctions are carried out.
port forwarding Forwarding of interface-based TCP application data through SSL-encrypted tunnels.
Port priority The priority used when a port attaches tags to Layer 2 packets. Packets received on portswith higher priorities are forwarded preferentially.
POS See packet over SDH/SONET
power up To start up a computer; to begin a cold boot procedure; to turn on the power
PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol
PPS See pulse per second
PQ See priority queue
PQ See priority queuing
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence
PRC primary reference clock
Precision TimeProtocol
Precision clock synchronization protocol for networked measurement and controlsystems, the 1588 standard stipulated by IEEE.
Preemption During the process of establishing CR-LSP, if you cannot fine one path that satisfiesrequirements, you can remove another established path and take up its bandwidthresource. That is called preemption. CR-LSP check whether the path can be preemptedaccording to two priority features, that is, Setup Priority and Holding Priority.Preemption is activated by the Resv message of RSVP-TE. Only when the priority ofPath1, which you want to set up, is higher than that of Path2, you can preempt thebandwidth source of Path2 for Path1.
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic componentsusing conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated ontoa non-conductive substrate.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
priority queue A priority queue is an abstract data type in computer programming that supports thefollowing three operations: (1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with anassociated priority (2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highestpriority, and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") (3)PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it
priority queuing The Priority Queuing (PQ) is a queue scheduling algorithm based on the absolute priority.According to the PQ algorithm, services of higher priorities are ensured with greaterbandwidth, lower latency, and less jitter. Packets of lower priorities must wait to be senttill all packets of higher priorities are sent. In this manner, services of higher prioritiesare handled earlier than others.
protection channels The channels allocated to transport the working traffic during a switch event. When thereis a switch event, traffic on the affected working channels is bridged onto on theprotection channels.
protection ground bar A bar connecting the PGND cable of the cabinet so that the cabinet and the earth are inthe same equipotential level.
protection groundcable
A cable which connects the equipment and the protection groud bar. Usually, one halfof the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Protection service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
protocol data unit It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.
provider edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE isresponsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, andexchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, aPE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network andthe public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binarysequence
A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of thevalues of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire emulationedge-to-edge
A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributesof a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet SwitchedNetwork (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time DivisionMultiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the realsituation.
PSTN See public switched telephone network
PTMP See point to multipoint
PTN packet transport network
PTP See Precision Time Protocol
public switchedtelephone network
A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the publicsubscribers. Sometimes called POTS.
pulse per second Pulse per second, which, strictly speaking, is not a time synchronization signal. This isbecause 1PPS provides only the "gauge" corresponding to the UTC second, but does notprovide the information about the day, month, or year. Therefore, 1PPS is used as thereference for frequency synchronization. On certain occasions, 1PPS can also be usedon other interfaces for high precision timing.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
PVP See permanent virtual path
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
Q
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tagof the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of thecarrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
QoS See quality of service
quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet lossratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of thetransmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of aservice provider to meet the demands of users.
R
R99 Release 1999
radio access network The network that provides the connection between CPEs and the CN. It isolates the CNfrom wireless network.
radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create anelectromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The ACwith frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classifiedinto such high-frequency current.
radio networkcontroller
An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity ofthe radio resources.
RAN See radio access network
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet accordingto the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronizationresulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.
Rapid Spanning TreeProtocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning treeconvergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible withthe STP protocol.
rated current The input current of the equipment as declared by the manufacturer.
RDI See remote defect indication
Re-optimization Re-optimization refers to the dynamic optimization of CR-LSPs, namely, the periodiccalculation of CR-LSP routes. If the recalculated route is better than the current route, anew CR-LSP is created. Traffic switches from the original CR-LSP to the new CR-LSP,and then the original CR-LSP is deleted.
Real Time Protocol Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is a host-to-host protocol. It is used to deliver real-time services such as audio and video over the IP network.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
real time variable bitrate
The rt-VBR is intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over IP(VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell rate (PCR),sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can expect the sourcedevice to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time.
Real-time TransportProtocol
A type of host-to-host protocol used in real-time multimedia services such as Voice overIP (VoIP) and video.
reboot To start the system again. Programs or data will be reloaded to all boards.
RED See random early detection
reference clock A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocksfor reference.
REI See remote error indication
remote defectindication
A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminaldetects specific defects in the incoming signal.
remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There aretwo types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstreamLTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) issent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.
remote maintenanceassociation end point
For the other devices in the same MA, their MEPs are called the Remote Maintenanceassociation End Points (RMEPs).
remote monitor A widely used network management standard defined by the IETF, and it enhances theMIB II standard greatly. It mainly functions to monitor the data traffic over a networksegment or the entire network. RMON is completely based on the SNMP architecture,including the NMS and the Agent running on each network device.
Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to theoperation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control ofthe IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sourcessuch as InterNIC.
required Min Rxinterval
The minimum interval between received BFD control packets that the local system iscapable of supporting.
Resource ReservationProtocol
The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and isused to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transportlayer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network controlprotocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
reverse pressure A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit endtransmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit endto slow down the transmission rate.
RF See radio frequency
RFC See Request For Comments
ring network A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes,forming a circular pathway for signals.
RIP See Routing Information Protocol
RMEP See remote maintenance association end point
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
RMON See remote monitor
RMRI See required Min Rx interval
RNC See radio network controller
RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
rollback A return to a previous condition through cancellation of a certain operation.
Root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-levelalarms always accompany a root alarm.
Route restriction The constraint conditions for calculating a route. When creating a trail, the user canspecify the explicit route and the NEs that the trail cannot pass. The explicit route andthe NEs are the constraints for calculating the route. The inevitable trail only functionswhen the number of routes is calculated as 1. Double-click the NE icon can set the NEas an NE that cannot be passed, and double-clicking it again can cancel the setting.
Routing InformationProtocol
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a routebased on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vectorprotocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and isknown to waste bandwidth.
routing policy Routing policies are implemented to filter routing information, mainly through thechange of route properties.
routing protocol A formula used by routers to determine the appropriate path onto which data should beforwarded.
routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routersregularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on thedestination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--inhops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.
RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It cancommunicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and thetransmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.
RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digitalinterface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and othersare the same as RS232.
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol
rt-VBR See real time variable bit rate
RTP See Real-time Transport Protocol
RTP See Real Time Protocol
S
S-VLAN service VLAN
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock referencesource through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronizationof the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is missing, this NEwill trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protectionswitching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock qualityinformation of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte totransmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of themultiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization qualitygrades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can beimplemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol.
SC See square connector
SCR sustainable cell rate
SD See signal degrade
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy
SDP serious disturbance period
security alarm A message generated when a security-related event that is defined by security policy asbeing an alarm condition has been detected. A security alarm is intended to come to theattention of appropriate entities in a timely manner.
security level The classification of the security according to its significance.
security log Security logs record the security operations on the NMS, such as logging in to the server,modifying the password, and exiting from the NMS server.
SEMF See synchronous equipment management function
sequence number An identifying number used to designate a block of data, an operation, or part of anoperation.
service data The user and/or network information required for the normal functioning of service.
SETS See synchronous equipment timing source
Setup Priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicatesthe highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt theresources required by other backup tunnels.
SFP See small form-factor pluggable
shaping The process of delaying packets within a traffic stream to cause it to conform to certaindefined traffic profile.
SHDSL See single-line high speed digital subscriber line
shortest path first Link-state, is a hierarchical IGP routing algorithm proposed as a successor to RIP in theInternet community. OSPF features include least-cost routing, multipath routing, andload balancing. OSPF was derived from an early version of the IS-IS protocol. See IS-IS.
signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscribersignal cable.
signal degrade A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect(e.g., dDEG) condition is active.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
signaling stream Control stream that controls calls and bearer.
Simple NetworkManagement Protocol
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modifythe management information of a network element. This protocol ensures thetransmission of management information between any two points. The pollingmechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, whichcan be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on thenetwork and report these activities to the network console workstation. Controlinformation about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Simple TrafficClassification
Simple traffic classification (STC) organizes data packets into multiple priorities ormultiple service classes. A network administrator can set STC policies. An STC policycan include the IP precedence or the DSCP value of an IP packet, the EXP value of anMPLS packet, the ToS field in the IP packet header or the 802.1p value of a VLANpacket.
single-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action only at the affected end ofthe protected entity (e.g. "trail", "subnetwork connection"), in the case of a unidirectionalfailure.
single-line high speeddigital subscriber line
A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, andHDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the userterminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulseamplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and providethe broadband access service.
Slicing To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.
small form-factorpluggable
A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
SMB sub-miniature B
Smooth upgrade Process of upgrading the system files without service interruption
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
SONET See synchronous optical network
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundantnetwork to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prunea loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SPE See superstratum provider edge
SPF See shortest path first
SQN See sequence number
square connector Cables may use two styles of connectors: "square" and "D-style".
SSM See Synchronization Status Message
SSMB synchronization status message byte
static ARP A protocol that binds some IP addresses to a specified gateway. The packet of these IPaddresses must be forwarded through this gateway.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
static route A route that cannot adapt to the change of network topology. Operators must configureit manually. When a network topology is simple, the network can work in the normalstate if only the static route is configured. It can improve network performance and ensurebandwidth for important applications. Its disadvantage is as follows: When a network isfaulty or the topology changes, the static route does not change automatically. It mustbe changed by the operators.
static routing table A static routing table is constructed manually by the system administrator using the routecommand.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can betransmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only toactive input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devicesto be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.
STP See Spanning Tree Protocol
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets aredestined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,server or router and is matched with the IP address.
super long packet The packet that has a length of more than 1,600 bytes.
super short packet The packet that has a length of less than 64 bytes.
superstratum provideredge
The SPE devices are core devices that are located within a VPLS full-meshed network.The UPE devices that are connected with the SPE devices are similar to the CE devices.The PWs set up between the UPE devices and the SPE devices serve as the ACs of theSPE devices. The SPE devices must learn the MAC addresses of all the sites on UPEside and those of the UPE interfaces that are connected with the SPE. SPE is sometimescalled NPE.
Switching restorationtime
It refers to the period of time between the start of detecting and the moment when theline is switched back to the original status after protection switching occurs in the MSPsub-network.
Synchronization StatusMessage
A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clockinformation through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on theirclocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward thesynchronization information to downstream nodes.
Synchronize Alarm When synchronizing the alarms, the network management system checks the alarms inthe network management system database and the alarms in the NE. If they areinconsistent, the alarms in the NE are uploaded to the network management systemdatabase and overwrite the old ones.
synchronize NE time To send the system time of the server of the network management system to NEs so asto synchronize all NEs with the server.
synchronous digitalhierarchy
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines thetransmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speedcounterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH issuitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity sinceit uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
synchronousequipmentmanagement function
The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms intoobject-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.
synchronousequipment timingsource
The SETS function provides timing reference to the relevant component parts ofmultiplexing equipment and represents the SDH network clement clock.
synchronous opticalnetwork
A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers toconnect networks based on fiberoptic cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple datatypes (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbps, but multiplesof this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbps (gigabits per second).
Synchronous source A clock providing timing services to connected network elements. This would includeclocks conforming to Recommendations G.811, G.812 and G.813.
SYSLOG Syslog is an industry standard protocol for recording device logs.
Syslog Service Syslog service is used to manage the device to send the log information to the host. It isused on the sending-information port.
system logging System log tracks miscellaneous system events like startup, shutdown and events likehardware and controller failures.
T
Tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded whenthe queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-widesynchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
tangent rings It is a concept in geometry. There is a public node between two ring networks. The publicnode often brings in single-point failure.
TCH See traffic channel
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol
TCP/IP See Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDD See time division duplex
TDM See time division multiplexing
TE See traffic engineering
TelecommunicationManagement Network
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communicationsnetwork. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networksand services.
threshold-crossing A performance monitoring parameter reaches or exceeds a preset threshold.
throughput The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment, connection,service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be measured with bandwidth.
TIM trace identifier mismatch
time division duplex In Time Division Duplex (TDD) system, the uplink and downlink links use differenttimeslots. They usually share the same frequency.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
time divisionmultiplexing
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3, ...), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross timeslots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmittedover one channel.
Time Slot Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are ableto interconnect.
time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in thenetwork. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
timing loop A network condition where a slave clock providing synchronization becomes locked toits own timing signal. It is generally created when the slave clock timing information islooped back to its own input, either directly or via other network equipment. Timingloops should be prevented in networks by careful network design.
TM See traffic management
TM See topology management
TMN See Telecommunication Management Network
token bucket algorithm The token bucket is a container for tokens. The capacity of a token bucket is limited, andthe number of tokens determines the traffic rate of permitted packets. The token bucketpolices the traffic. Users place the tokens into the bucket regularly according to the presetrate. If the tokens in the bucket exceed the capacity, no tokens can be put in. Packets canbe forwarded when the bucket has tokens, otherwise they cannot be transferred till thereare new tokens in the bucket. This scheme adjusts the rate of packet input.
token ring The IEEE 802.5 standard for a token-passing ring network with a star-configuredphysical topology. Internally, signals travel around the network from one station to thenext in a ring. Physically, each station connects to a central hub called a multistationaccess server.
tolerance Permissible degree of variation from a pre-set standard.
topology management Topology management displays static configuration objects on a graphic interface, aswell as the status data, monitoring data, and alarm data on the objects. It also enablesusers to perform operations on the GUI. The topology management is integrated withthe EAM, fault, and security NBI common service subsystems to provide the domain-based element management solution.
Topology Object A basic element in the NMS topology view, which includes submap, node, connection,and so on.
Topology view A basic component for the human-machine interface. The topology view directlydisplays the networking of a network as well as the alarm and communication statusesof each network element and subnet. In this manner, the topology view reflects the basicrunning conditions of the network.
ToS See type of service
ToS priority A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.
TPS See tributary protection switch
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
TPS protection The equipment level protection that uses one standby tributary board to protect Ntributary boards. When a fault occurs on the working board, the SCC issues the switchingcommand, and the payload of the working board can be automatically switched over tothe specified protection board and the protection board takes over the job of the workingboard. After the fault is cleared, the service is automatically switched to the originalboard
TR See token ring
traffic channel Indicates the channel that carries voice coding information or user data. Traffic channelsare classified into voice traffic channels and data traffic channels.
traffic classification Traffic classification enables you to classify traffic into different classes with differentpriorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified quality of service(QoS) in the entire network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treateddifferently.
traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the loadof the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic managementparameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize theutilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused byunbalanced loads.
Traffic frame discardflag
It is the traffic frame discard control. Two options are provided: enable and disable. Itindicates the means by which the NE discards cells when the network is congested. Whenthe frame discard mark is closed, the cells will be discarded at the cell level; when it isopened, they will be discarded at the frame level. Here, "frame" refers to the AALprotocol data unit.
traffic management Traffic management refers to the process of monitoring user traffic on a network andredistributing/rerouting it when necessary in order to ensure optimal networkperformance
traffic policy A full set of QoS policies formed by association of traffic classification and QoS actions.
trail termination sourceidentifier
The trail termination source identifier (TTSI) of the LSP is used to uniquely identify anLSP on a network.
transit The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group islabeled. The middle node is named Transit.
transit delay The period from the time when a site starts to transmit a data frame to the time when thesite finishes the data frame transmission or to the time when all data frames are receivedby the receiver.
Transmission ControlProtocol
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets tobe sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the completemessages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliablein the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer inthe ISO/OSI reference model.
Transmission ControlProtocol/InternetProtocol
Common name for the suite of protocols developed to support the construction ofworldwide internetworks.
transparenttransmission
A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content butencapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
transport plane The transport plane provides bidirectional or unidirectional transfer of user information,from one location to another. It can also provide transfer of some control and networkmanagement information. The transport plane is layered; it is equivalent to the transportnetwork defined in ITU-T Rec. G.805.
tributary protectionswitch
Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended toprotect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
tributary unit group One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way thatmixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructedto increase flexibility of the transport network
trTCM See two rate three color marker
trunk cable The main (often large diameter) cable of a coaxial cable system.
trunk line A transmission channel between two switching centers or nodes. It is used to connectthe exchange to the network.
TTL See time to live
TTSI See trail termination source identifier
TU tributary unit
TUG See tributary unit group
Tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnelensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnelis an MPLS tunnel.
twisted pair It is a four-pair wire medium-composed of pairs of wires - used in a variety of networks.
two rate three colormarker
The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, PeakInformation Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associatedburst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds thePIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds ordoesn't exceed the CIR.
type of service A field in an IP packet (IP datagram) used for quality of service (QoS). The TOS fieldhas 8 bits in length, which is divided into five subfields.
U
U-VLAN A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN.Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.
UAS unavailable second
UAT See unavailable time event
UBR See unspecified bit rate
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate Plus
UDP See User Datagram Protocol
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
unavailable time event A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severelyerrored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. Theevent will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than 10-3 within 10 consecutiveseconds.
underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI See user network interface
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unspecified bit rate No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is idealfor the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded,and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.
UPC/NPC See usage parameter control/network parameter control
Upper subrack The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.
Upper threshold The critical value that can induce unexpected events if exceeded.
UPS uninterruptible power supply
usage parametercontrol/networkparameter control
Usage Parameter Control/Network Parameter Control. During the communication, theUPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual circuit that is input tothe network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures will be taken to control.NPC is similar to the UPC in function. The difference is that the incoming trafficmonitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their positions. The UPClocates at the user/network interface, while the NPC at the network interface.
User DatagramProtocol
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send adatagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IPto deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliableconnectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet isreceived.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (forexample, ATM switches).
User operation log Record the operation of the user for the convenience of analysis and query.
V
V-NNI See virtual network-network interface
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface
variable bit rate One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike apermanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidthand is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
VBR See variable bit rate
VC See virtual channel
VCC See virtual channel connection
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
VCI See virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internalport of a data service processing board
virtual channel Any logical connection in the ATM network. A VC is the basic unit of switching in theATM network uniquely identified by a virtual path identifier (VPI)/virtual channelidentifier (VCI) value. It is the channel on which ATM cells are transmitted by theswitching.
virtual channelconnection
The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. Alogical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.
virtual channelidentifier
A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used toidentify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches onits way to its destination.
virtual circuit A channel or circuit established between two points on an ATM /a network. Virtualcircuits can be Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs) or Switched Virtual Circuits (SVCs) .
virtual leased line A point-to-point, layer-2 channel that behaves like a leased line by transparentlytransporting different protocols with a guaranteed throughput.
virtual local areanetwork
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physicalnetwork segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associatedwith switched Ethernet.
virtual network-network interface
A virtual network-network interface (V-NNI) is a network-side interface.
virtual path A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an ATMnetwork based on a common VPI.
virtual path identifier The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to whichVP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.
virtual private LANservice
A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLSenables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through theMAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network viaconnections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
virtual private wireservice
A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR,Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.
virtual route forward VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actualrouting device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs,performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances onthe device.
virtual switch instance An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to thevirtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridgefunction and can terminate PW.
virtual user-networkinterface
A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform serviceclassification and traffic control in HQoS.
VLAN See virtual local area network
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
VLAN ID Namely, it is the virtual LAN identifier. One Ethernet port can support 4K VLAN routes,and one NE can support up to 8K VLAN routes.
VLAN mapping A technology that enables user packets to be transmitted over the public network bytranslating private VLAN tags into public VLAN tags. When user packets arrive at thedestination private network, VLAN mapping translates public VLAN tags back intoprivate VLAN tags. In this manner, user packets are correctly transmitted to thedestination.
VLAN mapping table One of the properties of the MST region, which describes the relationship betweenVLANs and spanning tree instances.
VLL See virtual leased line
voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voiceinformation over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital formin discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of thepublic switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP See voice over IP
VP See virtual path
VPI See virtual path identifier
VPLS See virtual private LAN service
VPN See virtual private network
VPWS See virtual private wire service
VRF See virtual route forward
VSI See virtual switch instance
W
WAN See wide area network
Wander The long-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their idealposition in time (where long-term implies that these variations are of frequency less than10Hz).
wavelength The distance between successive peaks or troughs in a periodic signal that is propagatedthrough space. Wavelength is symbolized by the Greek letter lambda and can becalculated as speed divided by frequency.
wavelength divisionmultiplexing
A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation ofsingle mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiplechannels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.
WDM See wavelength division multiplexing
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. Thisscheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, accordingto their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priorityqueues can be scheduled.
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
weighted random earlydetection
A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCPsynchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-prioritypacket when calculating the packet loss ratio.
WFQ See weighted fair queuing
wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which arephysically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as aprovince, a state or even a country.
winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
Working path The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.
WRED See weighted random early detection
wrong packets The packets with received messages not translated or translated incorrectly.
X
X digital subscriber line A family of bandwidth-efficient modulation techniques, developed to achieve extremelyhigh data transfer rates over twisted- pair cables. While the letter "X" represents avariable, DSL stands for "Digital Subscriber Line". XDSL techniques may offer severalbenefits such as, capability to offer high-speed data services to customers, low cost byusing existing infrastructure and switching congestion relief caused by existing datausers.
xDSL See X digital subscriber line
OptiX PTN 960 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesHardware Description G Glossary
Issue 02 (2013-08-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219